Pi4700e Printer Controller User Manual

Pi4700e Printer Controller User Manual
4341-7704-01
User Manual
Pi4700e Printer Controller
Contents
Contents
1
2
Before Using the Printer Driver
1.1
Features of the Controller ............................................................1-1
1.2
Configuration.................................................................................1-6
1.3
Connecting the Controller............................................................1-7
1.4
Settings Made on the Machine.....................................................1-8
Priority Device .................................................................................1-8
On Line / Ready ..............................................................................1-8
1.5
Installing the Printer Drivers ........................................................1-9
Installing the Printer Driver
2.1
Windows 95/98/Me ........................................................................2-1
Operating Environment ...................................................................2-1
Installing ..........................................................................................2-2
Making General Settings Before Using the Printer .........................2-6
Displaying a Properties dialog box..................................................2-6
Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printers window .........2-7
Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu ........2-7
2.2
Windows 2000/XP..........................................................................2-8
Operating Environment ...................................................................2-8
Installing ..........................................................................................2-9
Making General Settings Before Using the Printer .......................2-13
Displaying a Properties dialog box................................................2-13
Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder...........2-14
Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu ......2-14
2.3
Windows NT4.0............................................................................2-15
Operating Environment .................................................................2-15
Installation .....................................................................................2-16
Making General Settings Before Using the Printer .......................2-20
Displaying a Properties dialog box................................................2-21
Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder...........2-21
Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu ......2-21
Pi4700e
i
Contents
3
ii
Network Settings
3.1
Introduction................................................................................... 3-1
3.2
Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel..... 3-2
Setting procedure ........................................................................... 3-2
3.3
Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP............................................... 3-5
Configuration Procedure (Windows 95/98/Me)............................... 3-5
Installing the printer (Windows 95/98/Me) ...................................... 3-6
Configuration Procedure (Windows NT 4.0)................................... 3-7
Installing the printer (Windows NT 4.0) .......................................... 3-7
3.4
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)................................. 3-8
Installing the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program ............................. 3-8
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Printing Program ............................... 3-9
Adding a Printer Manually ............................................................ 3-10
3.5
Peer-to-Peer Printing with IPX/SPX .......................................... 3-12
Configuration Procedure............................................................... 3-12
To install the printer ...................................................................... 3-12
3.6
IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)........................ 3-14
Installing the IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program ......................... 3-14
3.7
LPR Printing................................................................................ 3-17
Configuration Procedure (Windows NT 4.0)................................. 3-17
Installing the printer (Windows NT4.0) ......................................... 3-18
Configuration Procedure (Windows 2000/XP).............................. 3-19
Installing the printer (Windows 2000/XP) ..................................... 3-19
3.8
IPP Printing ................................................................................. 3-21
Configuration Procedure............................................................... 3-21
Installing the printer ...................................................................... 3-21
3.9
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light............... 3-23
Access .......................................................................................... 3-23
Operation...................................................................................... 3-23
Logging In to the Admin Mode...................................................... 3-23
Network Tab ................................................................................. 3-24
Pi4700e
Contents
4
5
Properties Settings
4.1
Description of each tab ................................................................4-1
4.2
Device Options Setting tab ..........................................................4-2
Mailbox Setting dialog box
<when Mailbin Finisher is installed> ...............................................4-4
4.3
Functions common to various tabs ............................................4-5
Functions of the Save Easy Set Name dialog box ..........................4-6
4.4
Setup tab........................................................................................4-7
Functions of the Detail of Paper Source dialog box ......................4-11
Functions of the Detail Of Output Setting dialog box ....................4-13
4.5
Paper tab......................................................................................4-16
Functions of the Edit Custom Paper or Custom Paper dialog
box ................................................................................................4-19
4.6
Quality tab....................................................................................4-21
PCL6 version.................................................................................4-21
PS version.....................................................................................4-22
Functions of the Halftoning dialog box ..........................................4-23
4.7
Job Management tab ..................................................................4-24
4.8
Overlay tab...................................................................................4-27
Functions of the Watermark dialog box.........................................4-28
4.9
PostScript tab..............................................................................4-31
Functions of the Font Substitution Table dialog box .....................4-33
Functions of the Send Fonts As dialog box...................................4-34
Functions of the Advanced PostScript dialog box.........................4-35
4.10
Conflicts dialog box....................................................................4-36
Printer Driver for Linux
5.1
Installing the printer driver...........................................................5-1
Operating environment....................................................................5-1
Installation .......................................................................................5-2
5.2
Printer setting with X window System ........................................5-4
Making general settings before using the printer ............................5-4
Redhat Linux ...................................................................................5-4
Turbo Linux .....................................................................................5-7
Open Linux....................................................................................5-10
SuSE Linux ...................................................................................5-12
How to display Printer Utility dialog box ........................................5-15
dipjl command ...............................................................................5-16
Printing method (dilpr command) ..................................................5-16
didialog command .........................................................................5-17
Pi4700e
iii
Contents
5.3
6
7
iv
Properties settings ..................................................................... 5-18
Description of each tab................................................................. 5-18
Device Options Setting tab ........................................................... 5-19
Functions that are common to various tabs.................................. 5-21
Setup tab ...................................................................................... 5-23
Paper tab ...................................................................................... 5-31
Job Management tab.................................................................... 5-33
Conflicts dialog box ...................................................................... 5-35
Printer Driver for Macintosh
6.1
Installing the printer driver .......................................................... 6-1
Operating environment ................................................................... 6-1
Installation (Macintosh OS 7/8/9) ................................................... 6-1
Installation (Mac OS X)................................................................... 6-9
6.2
Print options ............................................................................... 6-14
Print options (Macintosh OS 7/8/9)............................................... 6-14
Installable Options ........................................................................ 6-15
Page Attributes ............................................................................. 6-16
PostScript Options........................................................................ 6-17
General......................................................................................... 6-18
Background Printing ..................................................................... 6-19
Cover Page................................................................................... 6-20
Color Matching ............................................................................. 6-21
Layout........................................................................................... 6-22
Error Handling .............................................................................. 6-23
Save as File.................................................................................. 6-24
Printer Specific Options ................................................................ 6-25
Conflicts dialog box ...................................................................... 6-32
Print options (Mac OS X).............................................................. 6-33
Paper & Quality Settings .............................................................. 6-34
Paper Source Settings.................................................................. 6-35
Job Management.......................................................................... 6-36
Finishing Settings ......................................................................... 6-37
Summary ...................................................................................... 6-39
Convenient Functions
7.1
Introduction................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
Printing on both sides of the paper ............................................ 7-2
Overview......................................................................................... 7-2
Procedure ....................................................................................... 7-2
7.3
Printing more than one copy at a time ....................................... 7-4
Overview......................................................................................... 7-4
Procedure ....................................................................................... 7-4
Pi4700e
Contents
7.4
Specifying N-up printing ..............................................................7-6
Overview .........................................................................................7-6
Procedure........................................................................................7-6
7.5
Printing in reduced/enlarged size................................................7-8
Overview .........................................................................................7-8
Procedure........................................................................................7-8
7.6
Printing pages with watermarks ................................................7-10
Overview .......................................................................................7-10
Procedure......................................................................................7-10
7.7
Specifying booklet printing........................................................7-12
Overview .......................................................................................7-12
Procedure......................................................................................7-12
7.8
Printing pages with a distribution number ...............................7-14
Overview .......................................................................................7-14
Procedure......................................................................................7-14
7.9
Using the copy track function....................................................7-16
Overview .......................................................................................7-16
Procedure......................................................................................7-16
7.10
Printing on OHP transparencies................................................7-18
Overview .......................................................................................7-18
Procedure......................................................................................7-18
7.11
Adding a cover to each copy set ...............................................7-20
Overview .......................................................................................7-20
Procedure......................................................................................7-20
7.12
Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function .................7-22
Overview .......................................................................................7-22
Procedure on the printer driver side..............................................7-22
Procedure on the machine side (Unlocking a job) ........................7-23
Procedure on the machine side (Deleting a job) ...........................7-25
7.13
Using the folding function..........................................................7-27
Overview .......................................................................................7-27
Procedure......................................................................................7-27
7.14
Using the settings function........................................................7-29
Overview .......................................................................................7-29
Procedure......................................................................................7-29
Using the settings stored for a current print job ............................7-29
Storing settings .............................................................................7-30
Deleting settings which have been stored.....................................7-32
Pi4700e
v
Contents
7.15
8
vi
Confirming that the data has been transferred to the
machine ....................................................................................... 7-34
Overview....................................................................................... 7-34
Procedure ..................................................................................... 7-34
Network Interface Card
8.1
Outline ........................................................................................... 8-1
8.2
Getting ready ................................................................................ 8-1
Utility software (on the CD-ROM) ................................................... 8-2
System requirements...................................................................... 8-3
8.3
Setting up the network card ........................................................ 8-4
Connecting a network cable ........................................................... 8-4
Configuring the network card.......................................................... 8-4
8.4
Windows configuration................................................................ 8-5
8.5
NetWare configuration ................................................................. 8-5
Using NWSetup .............................................................................. 8-5
Using NetWare Client ..................................................................... 8-5
NetWare 4.x Configuration Using Bindery Emulation..................... 8-5
Configuration Using Novell Directory Services ............................... 8-8
Configuring NetWare Enterprise Print Services (NDPS) .............. 8-16
8.6
Macintosh configuration............................................................ 8-27
Setting Up AppleTalk.................................................................... 8-27
Selecting and Setting Up the Printer ............................................ 8-27
Network Card Configuration ......................................................... 8-28
8.7
Using the utility software........................................................... 8-28
Management Access Program (Windows) ................................... 8-28
BOOTP (Windows) ....................................................................... 8-32
NIManage for AppleTalk (Macintosh) ........................................... 8-34
NWSetup (Windows) .................................................................... 8-38
8.8
Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 8-46
LED Status Indicators................................................................... 8-46
Troubleshooting............................................................................ 8-47
Resetting to Factory Defaults ....................................................... 8-49
8.9
Jumper switch setting................................................................ 8-50
Network Card and Jumper Pin Positions...................................... 8-50
Resetting to Factory Defaults ....................................................... 8-50
Address Selection......................................................................... 8-52
Bus Handshaking ......................................................................... 8-52
8.10
Specifications ............................................................................. 8-53
Network Card................................................................................ 8-53
10/100BaseT Cable...................................................................... 8-53
Pi4700e
Contents
9
Scanner Mode
9.1
Outline............................................................................................9-1
E-Mail (Scan to E-mail) ...................................................................9-1
Folder (Scan to Server)...................................................................9-2
URL .................................................................................................9-3
Necessary Settings .........................................................................9-4
Necessary Devices (servers) ..........................................................9-4
9.2
Network Setting.............................................................................9-5
Accessing to PageScope Light .......................................................9-5
Operation ........................................................................................9-5
Logging In to the Admin Mode ........................................................9-5
SMTP & FTP Configuration.............................................................9-6
9.3
E-mail Destinations.......................................................................9-8
Configuring an E-Mail destination ...................................................9-9
Checking/changing registration (PageScope Light) ......................9-10
Deleting registration (PageScope Light) .......................................9-10
New registration (touch panel of the digital copier) .......................9-10
Checking/changing registration
(touch panel of the digital copier) ..................................................9-12
Deleting registration (touch panel of the digital copier) .................9-13
9.4
File destinations..........................................................................9-15
Configuring a File Destination .......................................................9-16
New registration (touch panel of the Digital Copier)......................9-18
Checking/changing registration
(touch panel of the digital copier) ..................................................9-19
Deleting registration (touch panel of the digital copier) .................9-20
Direct Input....................................................................................9-22
Scanning double-sided original: ....................................................9-23
Scanning with size specified: ........................................................9-24
Scanning with density changed:....................................................9-25
Scanning with Image Type changed: ............................................9-26
Scanning with file format changed: ...............................................9-26
Scanning with resolution changed: ...............................................9-27
9.5
How to input characters .............................................................9-28
Pi4700e
vii
Contents
10 PageScope Light
10.1
System requirements ................................................................. 10-1
10.2
Access ......................................................................................... 10-2
Operation...................................................................................... 10-2
Entering the password.................................................................. 10-2
10.3
Screen configuration.................................................................. 10-3
10.4
System tab .................................................................................. 10-5
➀ Summary .................................................................................. 10-5
➁ Details....................................................................................... 10-5
➂ Preference ................................................................................ 10-6
➃ Save Setting ............................................................................. 10-6
➄ Online Assistance ..................................................................... 10-6
10.5
Job tab......................................................................................... 10-7
Print Job Management ................................................................. 10-7
File Download............................................................................... 10-7
10.6
Printer tab.................................................................................... 10-8
Settings......................................................................................... 10-8
Printer Front Panel ..................................................................... 10-11
Test Print .................................................................................... 10-12
Font Information ......................................................................... 10-13
Printer Reset............................................................................... 10-14
Maintenance ............................................................................... 10-15
Local Interface ............................................................................ 10-16
10.7
Scanner tab ............................................................................... 10-17
10.8
Network tab ............................................................................... 10-18
11 Troubleshooting
11.1
viii
Unable to Print ............................................................................ 11-1
Unable to Make Correct Settings /
Unable to Print Exactly as Set ...................................................... 11-3
Poor Print Quality ......................................................................... 11-6
Error List ....................................................................................... 11-6
Pi4700e
Foreword
12 Appendix
12.1
Function combination matrix (Windows)..................................12-1
12.2
Function combination matrix (Macintosh)................................12-4
12.3
Function combination matrix (Linux)........................................12-7
12.4
Number of registrations .............................................................12-9
Number of registrations/Usable range for Easy Set......................12-9
Number of registrations/Usable range for Watermark.................12-10
Number of registrations/Usable range for Custom Paper ...........12-11
12.5
Preview Listing..........................................................................12-12
[Page Layout] ..............................................................................12-12
[Printer Figure] ............................................................................12-15
[Setting Preview] .........................................................................12-16
Specifications for the controller ...................................................12-19
Accessories.................................................................................12-24
Glossary ......................................................................................12-25
Pi4700e
ix
Foreword
Limited Software Warranty
Limited Warranty
Minolta warrants that the software will perform in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of (90) ninety days from the date
of purchase. Minolta does not warrant that the operation of the program
will meet your requirements. This limited warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.
Purchase Remedies
Minolta’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy with respect to the software shall be at Minolta’s option either, repair or replacement of the software. The software must be returned to Minolta with a copy of your proof
of purchase. The Limited Warranty is void if failure of the software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement software
will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or (30)
thirty days, whichever is longer.
The remedies provided herein are customer’s sole and exclusive remedies. In no event shall Minolta Corporation be liable for any lost profits, direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether
based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
Minolta Network Card Warranty
Warranty Term
Minolta Network Cards have a (1) One Year Warranty. The Network Card
must be returned to Minolta for repair or replacement at Minolta’s discretion.
Warranty Coverage
Minolta Corporation warrants this product to be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year from the date of receipt of
the unit. If the unit fails to function as written in the User’s manual, Minolta
will repair or replace the unit at no charge. Minolta will ship at their expense an exchange unit overnight to replace the defective unit.
The remedies provided herein are the customer’s sole and exclusive remedies. In no event shall Minolta Corporation be liable for any lost profits,
direct or indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether
based on contract, tort, or other legal history.
x
Pi4700e
Foreword
User Instructions
For the U.S.A. Users
FCC Part 15-Radio Frequency Devices
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and radiate radio frequency energy and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC Regulations, and any changes or
modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes
made by purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty
under FCC regulations.
FCC-F02
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded cables is
likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules.
For Canada Users
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-003 Issue 3)
This Class A digital apparatus complied with Canadian ICES-003
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IC-F03
For European Users
CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity)
This product complies with the following EU directives:
89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives.
This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded cables is
likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under EU directives.
Pi4700e
xi
Foreword
For Users of the Class B regulation’s countries
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded cables is
likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22
rules and local rules.
For Users except the Class B regulation’s countries
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
This device must be used with shielded interface cables. The use of non-shielded cables is
likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22
rules and local rules.
xii
Pi4700e
Foreword
Welcome
Congratulations on your selection of Minolta Pi4700e printer controller
and Network Interface Card for Pi4700e.
This User Manual explains how to run print cycles on the machine, to which
the controller is connected. It also provides information about how to setup
the Network Interface Card and operate the Digital Copier in a network environment. First read this manual carefully and thoroughly; then, keep it
close at hand so you can refer to it whenever it becomes necessary.
Some of the screens shown in this manual may look different from what
you will view in actual applications.
Trademark Acknowledgements
Minolta is a registered trademark of MINOLTA CO., LTD. Page Scope is
a trademark of MINOLTA CO., LTD.
Apple, AppleTalk, and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PCL, HP LaserJet III, HP LaserJet IIISi, HP LaserJet 4Si, are registered
trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. HP UNIX is a trademark of
Hewlett-Packard Company.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo,
Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.
Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
Sun and Solaris are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Copyright 2003 MINOLTA CO., LTD
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Pi4700e
xiii
Contents
xiv
Pi4700e
Before Using the Printer Driver
1.1
Features of the Controller
Chapter 1
1
1
The controller is an image controller designed to use the machine as a
printer, allowing you to print documents directly to the machine from a
computer to which the controller is connected. The printer driver, which is
used during printing, is equipped with various functions that make the
most out of the features of the machine. They enable you to use the same
functions as those offered by the machine. When actually running a print
cycle, you can specify various functions of the machine on your computer
screen.
✎
Note
When using the controller, be sure to set the machine to the On Line
state.
Some functions offered by the machine cannot be combined, such as
Staple and Hole-Punch, and some others may not be used because of
a paper size involved. The functions that cannot be selected appear
dimmed.
Further, if functions that are incompatible with each other are specified, the Conflicts dialog box will appear, prompting you to change the
settings. When this dialog box appears, check the details and reselect
the functions to ensure function compatibility.
Some settings, which are defied by the machine for the restricted combinations of different functions, can at times be accepted by the printer
driver. If a print command is issued from the personal computer with
such settings made, the machine does not produce the output correctly or abandons the job to produce nothing. Make sure that you make
correct settings.
Pi4700e
1-1
Before Using the Printer Driver
Features of the Controller
Features of the Controller
Chapter 1
1
Before Using the Printer Driver
Various Printing Functions
G
Makes prints that are sorted into complete sets of the originals or
grouped into uncollated groups, each containing prints of one original.
(p. 7-4)
G
Prints two pages of originals on both front and back sides of a single
sheet of paper. (p. 7-2)
Long Edge Binding
G
Enlarges or reduces the image on the original. (p. 7-8)
G
Prints two pages or four pages of originals on a single sheet of paper.
Maximum of 16 pages of originals can be printed on a single sheet of
paper. (p. 7-6)
2 up
1-2
Short Edge Binding
4 up
Pi4700e
1
Prints four pages of originals to both front and back sides of a single
sheet of paper. (p. 7-12)
G
Places text in the background. (p. 7-10)
G
Makes prints of complete sets of the originals, stapled together or
punched for filing. (p. 4-13)
Before Using the Printer Driver
G
By combining Collate with other finishing capabilities, you can make
complete sets of documents for immediate delivery without having to
do any further processing.
G
Pi4700e
Chapter 1
Features of the Controller
Adds a reference number (Distribution Number) to each document set
during printing. (p. 7-14)
1-3
Features of the Controller
Before Using the Printer Driver
Chapter 1
1
G
Prints only the cover on a different type of paper (such as colored paper). (p. 7-20)
G
Capable of printing on OHP transparencies. You can also insert interleaves, either blank or printed with the same contents as those on the
OHP transparencies. (p. 7-18)
G
Folds copies during finishing. (p. 4-13)
Crease
1-4
Half Folding
Z-Folding
Pi4700e
Administrative Functions
Pi4700e
G
Different accounts can be managed for printing records, just as when
using the machine as a copier.
G
Printing of confidential documents may be withheld until a legitimate
password is entered on the machine.
1-5
Chapter 1
1
Before Using the Printer Driver
Features of the Controller
Configuration
1.2
Configuration
The controller may be configured with the following options.
Before Using the Printer Driver
Chapter 1
1
G
Memory (64MB/128MB, Option)
Expands the memory capacity of Pi4700e.
G
Controller
Allows you to use the machine as a printer controlled by your personal
computer.
G
Hard Disk Drive (Option)
For downloading Mac PS fonts and storing them
G
NIC Board (Option)
Allows you to use the machine as a printer in a network environment.
✎
Note
The NIC Board must be mounted to use the scanner functions.
1-6
Pi4700e
Connecting the Controller
The controller is installed inside the machine. The installation procedures
are to be performed by service personnel.
The controller is connected to the computer by a printer cable or network
cable. Power to the controller is supplied from the machine.
✎
Tip
If you cannot print from your computer, make sure that the printer cable or network cable is connected to the corresponding connectors.
Pi4700e
1-7
Chapter 1
1.3
1
Before Using the Printer Driver
Connecting the Controller
Settings Made on the Machine
1.4
Settings Made on the Machine
The following functions must be set on the machine using its Utility Mode,
as they relate to the controller.
Priority Device
Before Using the Printer Driver
Chapter 1
1
Select the priority use of the machine, either as a copier or printer.
G
Copier: The machine is used as a copier.
The machine starts the print cycle only after it has received the entire
data of a particular print job.
The machine can be used for copying, since it starts printing only after
it has received the entire data of the job for printing. This means that
more time is available to you for copying, but you have to wait for a
longer time before a particular print job is done.
G
Printer: The machine is used as a printer.
The machine starts the print cycle before it completes receiving the entire data of a particular print job.
On receiving the data for one page, the machine starts printing, accepting no other job for copying. This means that less time is available
to you for copying, but you do not have to wait long before a particular
print job is done.
On Line / Ready
1-8
G
On Line key
This function is the same as that available in ordinary printers as On
Line/Off Line.
Select On Line normally. A lit lamp indicates that the machine is in the
On Line mode.
G
Ready Lamp
Data can be transferred while this lamp stays lit up. The lamp remains
blinking while data is being transferred.
Pi4700e
1.5
1
Installing the Printer Drivers
To make 100% use of the functions offered by the machine mounted with
the controller, install the attached printer drivers in your computer.
G
PCL6 printer driver for Windows 95
G
PCL6 printer driver for Windows 98/Me
G
PCL6 printer drive for Windows NT4.0
G
PCL6 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP
G
PS printer driver for Windows 95/98/Me
G
PS printer driver for Windows NT4.0
G
PS printer driver for Windows 2000/XP
G
PPD file for Macintosh
G
PPD Plugin for Mac OS X
G
PS print utility for Linux (Redhat, SuSE, Turbo, Open)
Before Using the Printer Driver
The controller is furnished with the following printer drivers:
Install the printer driver suitable for the operating system that runs on your
computer. For installation procedures, see the relevant page as detailed
below:
Pi4700e
G
Installing the Windows printer driver:
Windows 95/98/Me (p. 2-1)
Windows 2000/XP (p. 2-8)
Windows NT4.0 (p. 2-15)
G
Installing the Macintosh PPD file and PPD Plugin file:
See “6.1 Installing the printer driver” on page 6-1.
G
Installing the Linux print utility:
See “5.1 Installing the printer driver” on page 5-1.
Chapter 1
Installing the Printer Drivers
1-9
Installing the Printer Drivers
Before Using the Printer Driver
Chapter 1
1
1-10
Pi4700e
Windows 95/98/Me
This chapter describes the procedure for installing the printer driver on a
Windows operating system. For details on installation for Linux, refer to
chapter 5. For details on installation for a Macintosh, refer to chapter 6.
2.1
Windows 95/98/Me
Operating Environment
This section explains the required environment for the printer driver.
Before installing the printer driver, check that your computer meets the following requirements. If it doesn’t, the printer driver may not function properly.
Personal computer
IBM PC or compatible with Pentium 200MHz or
higher CPU
Operating system
Windows 95 (English), Windows 98 (English) or
Windows Me (English)
Memory
I/O interface
64MB or more
Parallel
Network
Free space on hard disk
Pi4700e
Chapter 2
Installing the Printer Driver
Centronics interface (Conforming to IEEE1284)
10/100BaseT (UTP)
10MB or more (PCL6)
2MB or more (PS)
G
Windows 2000/XP
For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Windows 2000/XP printer driver, see page 2-8.
G
Windows NT 4.0
For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Windows NT 4.0 printer driver, see page 2-15.
2-1
Installing the Printer Driver
2
2
Windows 95/98/Me
2
Installing
Chapter 2
✎
Installing the Printer Driver
This section explains the installation procedure for the Windows 98 printer
driver.
✎
Note
Before starting to install the printer driver, be sure first to quit all other
applications.
Tip
The following procedure assumes that the machine is a Digital Copier
and that the printer driver is PCL6: Read the specific proper names accordingly if the machine is a model other than the Digital Copier and if,
for example, the OS is Windows 95 and the printer driver is PS.
1 Click the Start button. From the menu that appears, select Settings,
then click Printers.
2 The Printers window will appear. Double-click the Add Printer icon.
3 The Add Printer Wizard will appear. Click the Next> button.
2-2
Pi4700e
Windows 95/98/Me
2
4 A window will appear, asking how the printer is to be connected. If your
✎
Note
When installing the printer driver in a computer connected to the machine via a network, be sure to consult the network administrator.
This is a request to be made of the network administrator. To install
the printer driver in a computer connected to a network, select Network printer and click the Next> button. Then, a window will appear
prompting you to enter the network path: Enter the path.
5 A window will appear, prompting you to select the manufacturer and
model of your printer. Click the Have Disk... button on the lower right
part of the screen.
Pi4700e
2-3
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
computer is directly connected to the machine, select Local printer
and then click the Next> button.
Windows 95/98/Me
2
6 The Install From Disk dialog box will appear. Install the controller driver
CD-ROM that is included with the controller in the CD-ROM drive of
your computer.
Chapter 2
7 Click the Browse button, select the file corresponding to the type of
printer driver to be installed and the operating system being used, and
then click the OK button.
8 A Printers list appears.
Installing the Printer Driver
Select the driver to be installed and click the Next> button.
✎
Tip
PS driver is different for each model: Select according to model of the
machine used.
9 A window that prompts you to select the port will appear. Select the
port (normally LPT:) to which the printer cable has been connected,
then click the Next> button.
10 A window that asks you to confirm the printer name will appear. Check
the printer name. If you want to designate this printer as the default
printer, select Yes.
Click the Next> button.
11 A screen that allows you to select printing of a test page will appear.
If you want to print a test page, select Yes (recommended). If you
elect not to, select No. It is recommended that a test page be printed
to ensure that the printer driver has been installed properly. Now, click
the Finish button.
2-4
Pi4700e
Windows 95/98/Me
2
12 Installation will start.
When all the files have been copied from the CD-ROM, the corresponding
icon will be added to the Printers window.
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
This completes the installation.
Pi4700e
2-5
Windows 95/98/Me
2
Making General Settings Before Using the Printer
Chapter 2
The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print
jobs, including the port to which the printer cable is connected and optional devices configured with the machine. These settings must be made using properties dialog box available from the Properties command after the
printer driver has been installed or whenever the operating environment is
changed.
Installing the Printer Driver
The most common settings were made when the printer driver was installed, meaning that you do not usually bother to change them. Some
items must, however, be changed in the following cases.
Cases where changes are necessary
Applicable property tab
You want to add a comment to distinguish the printer
from others
General
The computer’s connecting port has been changed
You want to change the conditions for the display of
a timeout error
You want to designate a port to which the machine is
connected via a network (this setting must be made
on a computer connected to the machine via a network)
Details
This setting is not related to printing.
Color Management
You want to share the machine with other computers
connected to the same network (this setting must be
made on the computer directly connected to the machine)
Sharing
For details of “Device Options Setting tab”, see page 4-2.
Displaying a Properties dialog box
There are two different steps to take to display a properties dialog box.
The contents of a particular properties dialog box slightly differ depending
on how you access it. Select the appropriate one according to your need.
(1) To display a properties dialog box from the Printers window
(2) To display a properties dialog box from an application menu
Below are the detailed procedures for each approach.
2-6
Pi4700e
Windows 95/98/Me
2
Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printers window
1 Click the Start button and select Settings. Then, click Printers.
3 Select Properties from the menu that will appear. This shows the
properties dialog box.
It allows you to set the environment in which you will use the printer. The
settings made through this method are valid in all applications.
Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu
As an example, the procedure for the PCL6 printer driver is described below.
1 Select Print... from the File menu of the application.
2 Make sure that the Name of the Printer is Minolta Di470 PCL6: If Minolta Di470 PCL6 is not listed, click ▼ and, from the menu that will
then appear, select Minolta Di470 PCL6.
3 Click the Properties button. This shows the properties dialog box.
This method allows you to set the number of copies and paper for each
document.
Note that the settings made on the properties dialog box accessed
through the application are valid only for that particular application.
✎
Tip
To set the Device Options Setting, which need not be changed unless
device is changed, open it from the Printers window to set.
To show a properties dialog box other than Setup, click the corresponding tab located on the top part of the screen.
✎
Note
The steps to display a properties dialog box may be different depending on the application. Follow the correct procedure according to the
application. The procedure above is based on the application WordPad.
Pi4700e
2-7
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
2 Right-click the appropriate printer icon (ex. Minolta Di470 PCL6).
Windows 2000/XP
2
2.2
Windows 2000/XP
Operating Environment
Chapter 2
This section explains the required environment for the printer driver.
Installing the Printer Driver
Before installing the printer driver, check that your computer meets the following requirements. If it doesn’t, the printer driver may not function properly.
Personal computer
IBM PC or compatible with Pentium 200MHz or
higher CPU
Operating system
Windows 2000 (English) or Windows XP (English)
Memory
64MB or more
I/O interface
Parallel
Centronics interface (Conforming to IEEE1284)
Network
10/100BaseT (UTP)
Free space on hard disk
2-8
10MB or more (PCL6)
2MB or more (PS)
G
Windows 95/98/Me
For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Windows 95/98/Me printer driver, see page 2-1.
G
Windows NT 4.0
For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Windows NT 4.0 printer driver, see page 2-15.
Pi4700e
Windows 2000/XP
2
Installing
Note
When starting up the operating system, log in with administrator privileges.
Before starting to install the printer driver, be sure first to quit all other
applications.
✎
Tip
The following procedure assumes that the machine is a Digital Copier
and that the printer driver is PCL6: Read the specific proper names accordingly if the machine is a model other than the Digital Copier and if,
for example, the OS is Windows XP and the printer driver is PS.
1 Click the Start button. From the menu that appears, select Settings,
then click Printers.
2 The Printers window will appear. Double-click the Add Printer icon.
3 Start the Add Printer Wizard.
Click the Next> button.
Pi4700e
2-9
Installing the Printer Driver
✎
Chapter 2
This section explains the installation procedure for the Windows 2000/XP
printer driver.
Windows 2000/XP
2
4 A screen that allows you to select the type of connection made of the
printer will appear. If the printer is directly connected to the computer,
select Local Printer and click the Next> button.
Chapter 2
✎
Installing the Printer Driver
Note
When installing the printer driver in a computer connected to the machine via a network, be sure to consult the network administrator.
5 A window the prompts you to select the port will appear. Select the
name of the port to be used and click the Next> button.
2-10
Pi4700e
Windows 2000/XP
2
6 A window will appear, prompting you to select the manufacturer and
7 The Install From Disk dialog box will appear. Install the controller driver
CD-ROM that is included with the controller in the CD-ROM drive of
your computer.
8 Click the Browse button, select the file corresponding to the type of
printer driver to be installed and the operating system being used, and
then click the OK button.
9 A Printers list appears.
Select the driver to be installed and click the Next> button.
10 A window that asks you to confirm the printer name will appear. Check
the printer name. If you want to designate this printer as the default
printer, select Yes.
Click the Next> button.
11 Follow the instructions that appears on your computer screen.
12 As the last step, click the Finish button.
Pi4700e
2-11
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
model of your printer. Click the Have Disk... button on the lower right
part of the screen.
Windows 2000/XP
2
13 Installation will start.
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
When all the files have been copied from the CD-ROM, the corresponding icon will be added to the Printers window. This completes the
installation.
2-12
Pi4700e
Windows 2000/XP
2
The most common settings were made when the printer driver was installed, meaning that you do not usually bother to change them. Some
items must, however, be changed in the following cases.
Cases where changes are necessary
Applicable property tab
You want to add a comment to distinguish the printer
from others
General
You want to share the machine with other computers
connected to the same network (this setting must be
made on the computer directly connected to the machine)
Sharing
The computer’s connecting port has been changed
You want to change the conditions for the display of
a timeout error
You want to designate a port to which the machine is
connected via a network (this setting must be made
on a computer connected to the machine via a network)
Ports
You want to restrict use condition of printer.
You want to change settings in spool condition.
You want to change OS-dependent settings.
Advanced
This setting is not related to printing.
Color Management
You want to restrict access to the machine
You want to check the accounts of the machine users
Security
This setting is not related to printing.
Processing
For the details of “Device Options Setting tab”, see page 4-2.
Displaying a Properties dialog box
You have two different steps to take to display a properties dialog box.
The contents of a particular properties dialog box slightly differ depending
on how you access it. Select the appropriate one according to your need.
(1) To display a properties dialog box from the Printers window
(2) To display a properties dialog box from an application menu
Below are the detailed procedures for each approach.
Pi4700e
2-13
Installing the Printer Driver
The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print
jobs, including the port to which the printer cable is connected and optional devices configured with the machine. These settings must be made using property sheets available from the Properties command after the
printer driver has been installed or whenever the operating environment is
changed.
Chapter 2
Making General Settings Before Using the Printer
Windows 2000/XP
2
Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder
1 Click the Start button and select Settings. Then, click Printers.
Chapter 2
2 Click the appropriate printer icon (ex. Minolta Di470 PCL6).
3 <To display the General dialog box>
Click Properties from the File menu.
4 <To display Printing Preferences dialog box>
Installing the Printer Driver
Click Printing Preferences… from the File menu.
It allows you to set the environment in which you will use the printer. The
settings made through this method are valid in all applications.
Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu
As an example, the procedure for the PCL6 printer driver is described below.
1 Select Print... from the File menu of the application.
2 Make sure that the Select Printer of the General is Minolta Di470
PCL6: If Minolta Di470 PCL6 is not listed, click ▼ and, from the menu
that will then appear, select Minolta Di470 PCL6.
This method allows you to set the number of copies and paper for each
document.
Note that the settings made on the properties dialog box accessed
through the application are valid only for that particular application.
✎
Tip
To set the Device Options Setting, which need not be changed unless
device is changed, open it from the Printers window to set.
To show a properties dialog box other than Setup, click the corresponding tab located on the top part of the screen.
✎
Note
The steps to display a properties dialog box may be different depending
on the application. Follow the correct procedure according to the application. The procedure above is based on the application WordPad.
With PostScript printer driver, the contents are different between when
the properties dialog box is accessed from Print Manager and when it
is accessed from an application.
2-14
Pi4700e
Windows NT4.0
2.3
2
Windows NT4.0
Before installing the printer driver, make sure that your computer meets
the following requirements. If it doesn’t, the printer driver may not function
properly.
Personal computer
IBM PC or compatible with Pentium
200MHz or higher CPU
Operating system
Windows NT4.0 (English)
Memory
64MB or more
I/O interface
Parallel
Centronics interface (Conforming to IEEE1284)
Network
10/100BaseT (UTP)
Free space on hard disk
Pi4700e
10MB or more (PCL6)
2MB or more (PS)
G
Windows 95/98/Me
For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Windows 95/98/Me printer driver, see page 2-1.
G
Windows 2000/XP
For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Windows 2000/XP printer driver, see page 2-8.
2-15
Installing the Printer Driver
This section explains the required environment for the printer driver.
Chapter 2
Operating Environment
Windows NT4.0
2
Installation
This section explains the installation procedure for the Windows NT 4.0
printer driver.
Chapter 2
✎
Installing the Printer Driver
Note
When starting up the operating system, log in with administrator privileges.
Before starting to install the printer driver, be sure first to quit all other
applications.
✎
Tip
The following procedure assumes that the machine is a Digital Copier
and that the printer driver is PCL6: Read the specific proper names accordingly if the machine is a model other than the Digital Copier and if,
for example, the printer driver is PS.
1 Click the Start button. From the menu that appears, select Settings,
then click Printers.
2 The Printers window will appear. Double-click the Add Printer icon.
3 Start the Add Printer Wizard. If the printer is directly connected to the
computer, select My Computer and click the Next> button.
✎
Note
When installing the printer driver in a computer connected to the machine via a network, be sure to consult the network administrator.
2-16
Pi4700e
2
4 A window that prompts you to select the port will appear. Select the
name of the port to be used and click the Next> button.
Pi4700e
2-17
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
Windows NT4.0
Windows NT4.0
2
5 A window will appear, prompting you to select the manufacturer and
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
model of your printer. Click the Have Disk... button on the lower right
part of the screen.
6 The Install From Disk dialog box will appear. Install the controller driver
CD-ROM that is included with the controller in the CD-ROM drive of
your computer.
7 Click the Browse button, select the file corresponding to the type of
printer driver to be installed and the operating system being used, and
then click the OK button.
8 A Printers list appears.
Select the driver to be installed and click the Next> button.
9 A window that asks you to confirm the printer name will appear. Check
the printer name. If you want to designate this printer as the default
printer, select Yes.
Click the Next> button.
10 Follow the instructions that appears on your computer screen.
11 As the last step, click the Finish button.
2-18
Pi4700e
Windows NT4.0
2
12 Installation will start.
Installing the Printer Driver
Chapter 2
When all the files have been copied from the CD-ROM, the corresponding icon will be added to the Printers window. This completes the
installation.
Pi4700e
2-19
Windows NT4.0
2
Making General Settings Before Using the Printer
Chapter 2
The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print
jobs, including the port to which the printer cable is connected and optional devices configured with the machine. These settings must be made using property dialog box available from the Properties command after the
printer driver has been installed or whenever the operating environment is
changed.
Installing the Printer Driver
The most common settings were made when the printer driver was installed, meaning that you do not usually bother to change them. Some
items must, however, be changed in the following cases.
Cases where changes are necessary
Applicable property tab
You want to add a comment to distinguish the printer
from others
General
The computer’s connecting port has been changed
You want to change the conditions for the display of
a timeout error
You want to designate a port to which the machine is
connected via a network (this setting must be made
on a computer connected to the machine via a network)
Ports
You want to specify a time frame for the machine operation
Scheduling
You want to share the machine with other computers
connected to the same network (this setting must be
made on the computer directly connected to the machine)
Sharing
You want to restrict access to the machine
You want to check the accounts of the machine users
Security
This setting is not related to printing.
Pressing
For the details of “Device Options Setting tab”, see page 4-2.
2-20
Pi4700e
Windows NT4.0
2
(1) To display a properties dialog box from the Printers window
(2) To display a properties dialog box from an application menu
Below are the detailed procedures for each approach.
Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder
1 Click the Start button and select Settings. Then, click Printers.
2 Click the appropriate printer icon (ex. Minolta Di470 PCL6).
3 <To display the General tab>
Select Properties from the File menu.
4 <To display Printing Preferences dialog box>
Click Document Defaults… from the File menu.
It allows you to set the environment in which you will use the printer. The
settings made through this method are valid in all applications.
Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu
As an example, the procedure for the PCL6 printer driver is described below.
1 Select Print... from the File menu of the application.
2 Make sure that the Name of Printer is Minolta Di470 PCL6: If Minolta
Di470 PCL6 is not listed, click ▼ and, from the menu that will then appear, select Minolta Di470 PCL6.
3 Click the Properties button. This shows the properties dialog box.
This method allows you to set the number of copies and paper for each
document.
Note that the settings made on the properties dialog box accessed
through the application are valid only for that particular application.
Pi4700e
2-21
Installing the Printer Driver
There are two different steps to take to display a properties dialog box.
The contents of a particular properties dialog box slightly differ depending
on how you access it. Select the appropriate one according to your need.
Chapter 2
Displaying a Properties dialog box
Windows NT4.0
2
✎
Chapter 2
Tip
To set the Device Option Setting, which need not be changed unless
device is changed, open it from the Printers window to set.
To show a properties dialog box other than Setup, click the corresponding tab located on the top part of the screen.
Installing the Printer Driver
✎
Note
The steps to display a properties dialog box may be different depending on the application. Follow the correct procedure according to the
application. The procedure above is based on the application WordPad.
With PostScript printer driver, the contents are different between when
the properties dialog box is accessed from Print Manager and when it
is accessed from an application.
2-22
Pi4700e
Introduction
3
3
Network Settings
3.1
Introduction
This chapter consists of the sections listed below.
(1) Specifying the IP address from the printer’s touch panel
✎
Note
In order to specify the IP address in a TCP/IP environment, the BootP
and Map Utility are used in addition to entering the address from the
printer’s touch panel. For details, refer to “8.7 Using the utility software” on page 8-28.
(2) Using the printing functions
Windows 95/98/Me
G
Peer-to-peer printing with TCP/IP
See “3.3 Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP” on page 3-5.
G
Peer-to-peer printing with IPX/SPX
See “3.5 Peer-to-Peer Printing with IPX/SPX” on page 3-12.
Windows NT 4.0
G
Peer-to-peer printing with TCP/IP
See “3.3 Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP” on page 3-5.
G
LPR printing
See “3.7 LPR Printing” on page 3-17.
Windows 2000/XP
G
LPR printing
See “3.7 LPR Printing” on page 3-17.
G
IPP printing
See “3.8 IPP Printing” on page 3-21.
(3) Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
Pi4700e
3-1
Network Settings
Chapter 3
Though this Network Card does not support NetBEUI protocol, it supports
TCP/IP and IPX/SPX, which provides plenty of connection flexibility for the
Windows computer.
3
Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel
A Windows 95/98/Me network printer can be used by going through a Novell NetWare or Windows 2000/NT server. This Network Card, however,
can be configured with its bundled peer-to-peer printing programs for
peer-to-peer printing without a server. Peer-to-peer printing can be performed using TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
There are two ways you can print from Windows 2000/XP with TCP/IP: using the Windows 2000/XP standard LPR printing function, and using the
Windows 2000/XP standard IPP printing function.
3.2
Network Settings
Chapter 3
There are two ways you can print from Windows NT 4.0 with TCP/IP: using the bundled IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program, and using the Windows
NT standard LPR printing function.
Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch
Panel
Setting procedure
1 Press the [Utility] key.
2 Touch [Administrator Mode] and input the Administrator code.
3 Touch [NetworkSet].
3-2
Pi4700e
Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel
3
Chapter 3
4 Touch [IP Address].
5 With the keypad in the operation panel, type in the IP address, and
Network Settings
then touch [Enter].
6 With the keypad in the operation panel, type in the subnet mask, and
then touch [Enter].
Pi4700e
3-3
Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel
3
7 With the keypad in the operation panel, type in the default gateway,
Chapter 3
and then touch [Enter].
Network Settings
8 In order to activate the address settings, turn the printer off, then on
again.
3-4
Pi4700e
Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP
3.3
3
Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP
Use the bundled IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program for TCP/IP peer-topeer printing under Windows.
Chapter 3
Digital Copier
Network Card
Network Settings
TCP/IP
Windows TCP/IP
IP Peer to Peer Printing Program
Configuration Procedure (Windows 95/98/Me)
1 Install TCP/IP under Windows.
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information.
2 Assign the IP parameters.
See “3.2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel”
(p. 3-2) for more information.
3 Install the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program.
Use the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program for peer-to-peer printing.
See “3.4 Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)” (p. 3-8) for more
information.
4 Use the procedure below to install the printer.
Pi4700e
3-5
Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP
3
Installing the printer (Windows 95/98/Me)
1 On the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Printers.
2 Double-click Add Printer and install the printer. Make the new printer
the default printer.
See “2 Installing the Printer Driver” (p. 2-1) for details about how to install it.
Chapter 3
3 Right-click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu.
4 Display the Details tab.
5 Click the Print to the following port box and then select the port add-
Network Settings
ed by the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program.
6 Click the Apply button of the Properties dialog box.
7 Display the General tab and print a test page.
8 If the test prints normally, complete the procedure by clicking OK to
close the Properties dialog box.
After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure, you can use
it just as you would any standard local printer. The printer can also be
used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network
whose Windows 95/98/Me systems are configured the same way as described above.
3-6
Pi4700e
Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP
3
Configuration Procedure (Windows NT 4.0)
1 Install TCP/IP under Windows NT4.0.
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information.
2 Assign the IP parameters.
3 Install the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program.
Use the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program for peer-to-peer printing.
See “3.4 Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)” (p. 3-8) for more
information.
Chapter 3
See “3.2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel”
(p. 3-2) for more information.
Installing the printer (Windows NT 4.0)
1 On the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Printers.
2 Double-click Add Printer and install the printer. Make the new printer
the default printer.
See “2 Installing the Printer Driver” (p. 2-1) for details about how to install it.
3 Right-click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu.
4 Display the Ports tab.
5 From the Print to the following port(s) list, select the port where the
Digital Copier IP address is displayed.
6 Click the OK button of the Properties dialog box to close it.
7 Right-click the printer icon again to display its Properties dialog box,
display the General tab, and then perform a Test Print operation.
8 If the test prints normally, complete the procedure by clicking OK to
close the Properties dialog box.
After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure, you can use
it just as you would any standard local printer. The printer can also be
used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network
whose Windows NT 4.0 systems are configured the same way as described above.
Pi4700e
3-7
Network Settings
4 Use the procedure below to install the printer.
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
3
3.4
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program is a Windows utility that lets you output directly to a printer from a computer on a network, without going through a
server.
Use this program for peer-to-peer printing under TCP/IP.
Chapter 3
Requirements
G
Computer must have TCP/IP installed and enabled.
G
Network Card must have valid IP parameters assigned.
✎
Network Settings
Note
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for information about
installing TCP/IP under Windows.
Installing the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program
Use the following procedure to install the IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program.
1 Load the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer you want
to use.
2 Start Setup.exe in the lp-p2p folder on the CD-ROM.
3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
The default installation directory is C:\Program Files\Ip-p2p. You can
change this to any other directory during the installation procedure.
✎
Note
The message Use the Add Printer Wizard in the Printer Group to
add new Peer to Peer IP Printers. appears on the screen at the end
of the installation procedure. The installation procedure does everything required to install the program correctly, so simply click OK to
clear this message.
3-8
Pi4700e
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
3
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Printing Program
1 On the Start menu, point to Programs and then Ip-p2p.
2 On the submenu that appears, click IP-P2P.
Network Settings
Chapter 3
Make the settings you want on the dialog box that appears.
❍
❍
❍
Pi4700e
Max Hops for Search
Input a value for the maximum number of hops for the search. The
initial default value is 2. See the precautions under “Management
Access Program (Windows)” (p. 8-28) for more information about
the maximum number of hops.
IP Port Base
Input the print server initial port number. The initial value is 10000
(TCP/IP port 10001), but you can change this setting if you need
to.
Printer Names
Select the printer port name display format.
based on Serial Numbers
Select this option to use Network Card serial numbers to distinguish between printers. The serial number is displayed as follows:
MLT_<serial number>
When a Network Card serial number is SN991354, for example,
the printer port name becomes MLT_991354.
based on IP Address
Default display format. Select this option to use IP addresses to
distinguish between printers. When the IP address is
199.99.92.99, for example, the printer port name becomes
199.99.92.99.
3-9
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
3
based on DNS Name
Select this option to use DNS names to distinguish between printers.
Example: PTR-MKTG.DOMAIN.COM
based on unit name
Select this option to use unit names to distinguish between printers.
3 After the settings are the way you want, click OK to close the dialog
Chapter 3
box. Restart Windows to put your settings into effect.
Network Cards may be undetectable with certain routers and maximum
hops settings made with the above procedure. When this happens, you
must add printers manually using the procedure describe below.
Network Settings
Adding a Printer Manually
1 On the Start menu, point to Programs and then Ip-p2p.
2 On the submenu that appears, click IP-P2P to display the Peer-toPeer IP Setup dialog box.
3 Click the Printers button to display the dialog box shown below.
3-10
Pi4700e
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
3
4 Input the required information for the printer you want to add into the
❍
❍
❍
IP Address
Input the IP address of the printer you want to add.
Name
Input the name you want to assign to the printer. Use an easily understandable name.
Port
Input the printer port number. The default port number is 10001.
Descriptions
Input a description of the printer.
5 After making all the settings, click Add to close the dialog box.
6 After you are finished adding printers, click OK.
Printers you add using IP Peer-to-Peer printing are added to the PORT list
of the printer properties dialog box and can be selected for printing.
Pi4700e
3-11
Network Settings
❍
Chapter 3
fields provided.
Peer-to-Peer Printing with IPX/SPX
3
3.5
Peer-to-Peer Printing with IPX/SPX
Use the bundled IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program for IPX/SPX peer-topeer printing under Windows.
With IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program, there is no need to run NetWare
Client.
Chapter 3
Digital Copier
Network Card
Network Settings
IPX/SPX
Windows 95/98/Me
IPX/SPX-compatible Protocol
IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program
Configuration Procedure
1 Install IPX/SPX-compatible Protocol under Windows.
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information.
2 Install the IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program.
Use the IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program for peer-to-peer printing.
See “3.6 IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)” (p. 3-14) for
more information.
3 Use the procedure below to install the printer.
To install the printer
1 On the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Printers.
2 Double-click Add Printer and install the printer. Make the new printer
the default printer.
See “2 Installing the Printer Driver” (p. 2-1) for details about how to install it.
3-12
Pi4700e
Peer-to-Peer Printing with IPX/SPX
3
3 Right-click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu.
4 Display the Details tab.
5 Click the Print to the following port box and then select the port added by the IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program.
8 If the test prints normally, complete the procedure by clicking OK to
close the Properties dialog box.
After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure, you can use
it just as you would any standard local printer. The printer can also be
used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network
whose Windows 95/98/Me systems are configured the same way as described above.
Pi4700e
3-13
Network Settings
7 Display the General tab and print a test page.
Chapter 3
6 Click the Apply button of the Properties dialog box.
IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
3
3.6
IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
Use this program for peer-to-peer printing under IPX/SPX. Just by installing this program, you can specify an IPX-based printer on the network as
a printer port.
Requirements
G
Computer must have IPX/SPX-compatible protocol installed.
Chapter 3
✎
Note
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for information about
installing IPX/SPX under Windows.
Network Settings
Installing the IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program
Use the following procedure to install the IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program.
1 Load the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer you want
to use.
2 Start Setup.exe in the lp-p2p folder on the CD-ROM.
3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
The screen shown below appears automatically after installation is
complete.
3-14
Pi4700e
IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
3
Pi4700e
OK
Clicking this button applies the changed settings and exits the program.
G
Cancel
Clicking this button exits the program without applying the changed
settings.
G
Clear
Clicking this button clears the contents of the Available Printers list,
except for printers whose permanent flag is turned on.
G
Delete
Clicking this button deletes the currently selected printer from the
Available Printers list. A deleted printer no longer appears in the
printer PORT list. A deleted printer can be re-added using the Find
Printers button.
G
Permanent
Clicking this button toggles the permanent flag setting on and off for
the printer that is currently selected in the Available Printers list. A
printer whose permanent flag is turned on is not cleared from the
Available Printers list by the Clear or Delete button, even if the printer is physically removed from the network.
G
Find Printers
Clicking this button searches for available printers on the network and
displays the corresponding print server names in the Available Printers list.
G
Select
Clicking this button toggles the S flag setting on and off for the printer
that is currently selected in the Available Printers list. A printer whose
S flag is turned on appears in the PORT list of the printer Properties
dialog box, where it can be selected. The initial start up default is S flag
on for all printers in the Available Printers list. Up to 30 S flags can
be turned on at any one time.
G
Available Printers
This is a list of all the printers detected on the network. You can clear
this list by clicking the Clear button. Then you can update the list by
clicking the Find Printers button.
The following describes the three fields of the Available Printers list.
3-15
Network Settings
G
Chapter 3
You can use this screen to configure the IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing program. If you do not want to change any settings, simply click OK to quit
the program. The following describes the contents of this screen.
IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program (Windows)
3
❍
❍
Network Settings
Chapter 3
❍
Unit name
This field shows Network Card names. The format for the default name
of this Network Card is MLT_<serial number>.
Description
This field displays a description of the printer. Normally, this field
shows the manufacturer name and printer model name.
Flags
An S flag displayed here means the select flag is turned on, so the
printer is included in the PORT list of the printer Properties dialog box.
A P flag displayed here means the permanent flag is turned on, so the
printer cannot be deleted from the list by the Clear List button or Delete button.
3-16
Pi4700e
LPR Printing
3.7
3
LPR Printing
This section explains how to use the Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP standard
LPR printing function.
Chapter 3
Digital Copier
Network Card
Network Settings
TCP/IP
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP
TCP/IP
Microsoft TCP/IP Printing
Requirements
G
Computer must have TCP/IP installed and enabled.
G
Network Card must have valid IP parameters assigned.
Configuration Procedure (Windows NT 4.0)
1 Install TCP/IP and Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service under Windows
NT.
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information.
2 Assign the IP parameters.
See “3.2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel”
(p. 3-2) for more information.
3 Use the procedure below to install the printer.
Pi4700e
3-17
LPR Printing
3
Installing the printer (Windows NT4.0)
1 On the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Printers.
2 Double-click Add Printer and install the printer. Make the new printer
the default printer.
See “2 Installing the Printer Driver” (p. 2-1) for details about how to install it.
Chapter 3
3 Right-click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu.
4 Display the Ports tab.
5 Click Add Port.
Network Settings
This displays a list of enabled port types.
6 Select LPR Port and then click New Port.
7 On the Add LPR compatible printer dialog box, type the IP address of
the Network Card into the Name or address of server providing lpd
box.
If the network you are on uses DNS (Domain Name Services), type in
the DNS name instead of the IP address.
8 Type PORT 1 into the Name of printer or print queue on that server
box, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
9 Click the Close button of the Printer Ports dialog box, and then click
the OK button of the Properties dialog box to close it.
10 Right-click the printer icon again to display its Properties dialog box,
display the General tab, and then print a test page.
11 If the test prints normally, complete the procedure by clicking OK to
close the Properties dialog box.
After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure, you can use
it just as you would any standard local printer. The printer can also be
used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network
whose Windows NT 4.0 systems are configured the same way as described above.
3-18
Pi4700e
LPR Printing
3
Configuration Procedure (Windows 2000/XP)
1 Install TCP/IP under Windows 2000/XP.
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information.
2 Assign the IP parameters.
3 Use the procedure below to install the printer.
Installing the printer (Windows 2000/XP)
1 Install the printer driver following the instructions that come with the in-
Chapter 3
See “3.2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel”
(p. 3-2) for more information.
2 Right-click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu.
3 Display the Ports tab.
4 Click Add Port.
This displays a list of available port types.
5 Select Standard TCP/IP Port from the list, and then click New Port.
This starts Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard.
6 Click Next on the introduction page of the wizard.
7 On the Add Port page, type the IP address of the Network Card into
the Printer Name or IP Address box.
If the network you are on uses DNS (Domain Name Services), type in
the DNS name instead of the IP address.
8 Type the name of the port you want into the Port Name box, and then
click Next.
✎
Note
When you type the IP address into the Printer Name or IP Address
box, the name of the port is automatically entered in the Port Name
box as IP_<IP address>, but you can change the port name as you
want.
Pi4700e
3-19
Network Settings
staller. Make the new printer the default printer.
LPR Printing
3
9 On the Additional Port Information Required page, select Custom,
and then click Settings.
10 On the Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box, select
LPR from the LPR Settings box.
11 Type PORT1 in the name of the queue you want into the Queue Name
box, and then check the LPR Byte Counting Enabled check box.
Chapter 3
12 Click OK to return to the Additional Port Information Required
page.
13 Click Next to display the next wizard page, and then click Finish.
14 Click the Close button of the Printer Ports dialog box, and then click
Network Settings
the Apply button of the Properties dialog box.
15 Display the General tab, and then print a test page.
16 If the test prints normally, complete the procedure by clicking OK to
close the Properties dialog box.
After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure, you can use
it just as you would any standard local printer. The printer can also be
used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network
whose Windows 2000/XP systems are configured the same way as described above.
3-20
Pi4700e
IPP Printing
3.8
3
IPP Printing
This section explains how to use the Windows 2000/XP standard IPP
printing function.
Chapter 3
Digital Copier
Network Card
Network Settings
IPP
Windows 2000/XP
TCP/IP
IPP Client
Requirements
G
Computer must have TCP/IP installed and enabled.
G
Network Card must have valid IP parameters assigned.
Configuration Procedure
1 Install TCP/IP under Windows 2000/XP.
Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information.
2 Assign the IP parameters.
See “3.2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer’s Touch Panel”
(p. 3-2) for more information.
3 Use the procedure below to install the printer.
Installing the printer
1 For Windows 2000, on the Start menu, point to Settings and then
click Printers.
For Windows XP, on the Start menu, click Printers and Faxes.
2 For Windows 2000, double-click the Add Printer icon to start the Add
Printer Wizard.
For Windows XP, click the Add Printer icon to start the Add Printer
Wizard.
Pi4700e
3-21
IPP Printing
3
3 Click Next on the introduction page of the wizard.
4 On the Local or Network Printer page, select the Network printer
option, and then click Next.
5 On the Locate Your Printer page, select the Connect to a printer on
the Internet or your intranet option.
6 Type the IPP printer’s URL into the URL field as shown below, and
Chapter 3
then click Next.
http://<IP address of the printer>:631/nic/Print
(Example) When the IP address of the Digital Copier is 192.9.200.200:
http://192.9.200.200:631/nic/Print
Network Settings
7 Click OK on the confirmation dialog box that appears.
8 In the Manufacturers and Printers lists, select the printer you want to
use, and then click OK.
If the name of the printer you want to use does not appear in the lists,
load the Printer Drivers CD-ROM that comes with your Digital Copier
into your computer’s CD-ROM drive and then click the Have Disk button. Next, specify the location of the printer’s INF file on the CD-ROM.
9 Select whether you use this printer as the default printer or not, and
then click Next.
10 Click Finish to exit the wizard.
11 Click the icon of the newly added printer to select it, and then click
Properties on the File menu.
12 Display the General tab and then print a test page.
13 If the test prints normally, complete the procedure by clicking OK to
close the Properties dialog box.
After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure, you can use
it just as you would any standard local printer. The printer can also be
used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network
whose Windows 2000/XP systems are configured the same way as described above.
3-22
Pi4700e
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3.9
3
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
Access
PageScope Light for Pi4700e can be accessed directly from a Web browser.
1 Start the Web browser.
2 In the URL field, enter the IP address of the printer controller as shown
Chapter 3
below.
http://<IP address of printer controller>/
(Example) When the IP address of the printer controller is
192.9.200.200:
3 This causes PageScope Light for Pi4700e screen to appear.
Operation
PageScope Light for Pi4700e operation is identical to that for Internet Web
pages. Clicking a hot link jumps to the link destination, and the Back and
Forward buttons scroll through pages backwards and forward.
Logging In to the Admin Mode
After you log in to PageScope Light in the Admin Mode, you can change
the configuration of the Digital Copier settings.
1 Type the administrator password into the Admin Password box. The
initial default administrator password is sysadm. See “Preference” for
information about how to change the password.
2 Click the Log-in button to log in to the Admin Mode.
3 When you want to log out, click the Log-out button.
✎
Note
Log out is performed automatically if no operation is performed for
more than 10 minutes.
On the Network tab, a password input text box appears on each setting screen. You must be able to input the correct password in order to
change Network tab settings. The password you should input here is
the same as the Admin Password you input on other tabs.
Pi4700e
3-23
Network Settings
http://192.9.200.200/
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
Network Tab
Use the Network tab for configuring the Pi4700e network interface.
✎
Chapter 3
Note
On the Network tab, you must type the password into the Password
box that appears on the setting screen you select on the menu. Note,
however, that you need to input the password on the Network tab only
once per session. After you input the password, the Password box
does not appear any more on other Network tab setting screens during the current session.
Summary
Network Settings
This screen appears when you click the Summary menu on the Network
tab. Use this screen to view a summery of the network interface card.
3-24
ROM Version
Network interface card firmware version
IP Address
IP address assigned to the current network interface card
Hardware Address
MAC address of network interface card
Serial Number
Serial number of network interface card
Pi4700e
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
TCP/IP Configuration
Network Settings
Chapter 3
This screen appears when you click the TCP/IP Configuration menu on
the Network tab. It lets you change a number of network interface card
TCP/IP settings.
Pi4700e
Password
Input the password assigned to the network interface card. The
initial factory default is sysadm. Clicking the Apply button after
inputting the wrong password displays a password error message without changing the settings.
IP Address
Input the IP address you want to assign to the network interface
card.
Subnet Mask
Input the network subnet mask.
Default Gateway
If the network has a router, input the IP address of the router.
Base Port Number
Type in the base port number for RAW port printing. A port
number that in one greater than the base port number you
specify here is used for actual printing.
Example: Specifying a base port number of 10000 results in an
actual port number of 10001.
DHCP
Checking this option sends a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) request whenever the network interface card is
powered up. When there is a DHCP server on the network, the
network interface card can obtain IP parameters automatically
from the server at power up.
IP Address in NVRAM
When this option is checked, the network interface card uses
the IP address stored in NVRAM when the card is powered up.
Apply button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
3-25
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
✎
Note
Use only IP parameters that have been specified or approved by your
network administrator.
Chapter 3
The network interface card does not send DHCP requests when
DHCP is disabled. If there is no IP address assigned to the network
interface card or if IP Address in NVRAM is turned off, the network
interface card sends a BOOTP request.
A DHCP request is sent when the network interface card is reset or
powered up (while DHCP is enabled and no IP address assigned to
the network interface card or if IP Address in NVRAM is turned off).
Network Settings
When DHCP is enabled, an IP address is assigned to the network interface card, and IP Address in NVRAM is turned on, the network interface card uses the IP address stored in NVRAM. In this case, the
network interface card does not send a DHCP request.
3-26
Pi4700e
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
NetWare Configuration
Network Settings
Chapter 3
Sub-menus appear when you click the NetWare Configuration menu on
the Network tab. Use the sub-menus to display and configure the network
interface card settings for NetWare printing.
NetWare Setting
This screen appears when you click the NetWare Setting sub-menu under the NetWare Configuration menu. It lets you change a number of
NetWare environment settings.
Pi4700e
Password
Input the password assigned to the network interface card. The
initial factory default is sysadm. Clicking the Apply button after
inputting the wrong password displays a password error message without changing the settings.
Enable NetWare
Check this option to enable IPX/SPX on the network interface
card. The NetWare environment is disabled while this option is
unchecked.
Print Server Name
Input the print server name you want. The default print server
name when this field is left blank is: MLT_<Network Interface
Card serial number>.
Print Server Password
When you want to use a password for logging into the network
interface card, type the password you want to specify into the
field. Type the same password into the Password Retype field
for confirmation. The password you specify must be the same
as the bindery and NDS-based print server password.
3-27
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
Network Settings
Chapter 3
3
Preferred File Server
Type in the name of the preferred file server when setting up
for bindery and bindery emulation. See “8 Network Interface
Card” for more information about the preferred file server.
The print server must always be configured on a preferred file
server. Failure to properly configure the preferred file server
can cause incorrect printing results.
Preferred NDS Context
Input the print server for NDS operation. In this case, always input the entire context, without inputting a period at the beginning of the path.
Example: ou=standard.ou=organization_1
Preferred NDS Tree
Input the print server for NDS operation. If you do not know
what the tree is, input whoami at the DOS command line.
Print Queue Scan Rate
Specify the print server’s queue scan interval in seconds. The
default scan rate is 1 second.
Ethernet Frame Type
Specify the frame type being used by Ethernet. Normally, the
frame type being used by NetWare is determined by monitoring
the network interface card. When the frame type is determined,
it is assumed that the network interface card is the same frame
type. Once you select a frame type, network interface card operation supports that NetWare frame type only.
Frame type monitoring normally starts from IEEE 802.3, and
then moves to Ethernet II and then 802.3 SNAP. When the network you are on uses multiple Ethernet frame types, use the
pull-down menu to select the frame type to be recognized.
Disable Bindery
Check this option to disable bindery when only the NDS mode
is used. When bindery is disabled, the network interface card
no longer supports the print server on the bindery file server.
Apply button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
The settings you make on this screen do not become valid until you reset
the network interface card or power it down and then back up again. See
“Reset” (p. 3-34) for more information on resetting the network interface
card.
3-28
Pi4700e
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
NetWare Status
Network Settings
Chapter 3
This screen appears when you click the NetWare Status sub-menu under
the NetWare Configuration menu. Use this screen to check the status of
the file server and queue to which the network interface card is attached.
File Server
Pi4700e
Name of the NetWare server to which the printer is currently attached
File Server Status
Status of connection to NetWare server
Queue Name
Name of NetWare print queue to which the printer is currently
allocated
Queue Status
NetWare print queue status
3-29
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
AppleTalk Configuration
Network Settings
Chapter 3
This screen appears when you click the AppleTalk Configuration menu
on the Network tab. It lets you change a number of AppleTalk environment settings.
3-30
Password
Input the password assigned to the network interface card. The
initial factory default is sysadm. Clicking the Apply button after
inputting the wrong password displays a password error message without changing the settings.
Enable AppleTalk
Check this option to enable AppleTalk on the network interface
card.
Printer Name
Input the printer name you want.
Zone Name
Input the name of AppleTalk zone in which you want to locate
the printer.
Apply button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Pi4700e
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
IPP Configuration
Network Settings
Chapter 3
This screen appears when you click the IPP Configuration menu on the
Network tab. It lets you change Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) settings.
You can configure the printer functions that are controlled by IPP and the
printer information that can be seen from IPP clients.
✎
Note
Standard access for IPP printing is:
http://<IP Address>:631/nic/Print
For details about IPP printing, see “8 Network Interface Card”.
Pi4700e
Password
Input the password assigned to the network interface card. The
initial factory default is sysadm. Clicking the Apply button after
inputting the wrong password displays a password error message without changing the settings.
Enable IPP
Check this option to enable IPP on the network interface card.
You cannot use IPP print unless this option is checked.
3-31
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
Network Settings
Chapter 3
The following items are returned when attributes are requested from an
IPP client.
3-32
Printer Name
Type in a name to identify the printer during IPP printing.
Printer Location
Type in the location of the printer.
Printer Information
Type in a description of the printer.
More Printer Information
Specify a URL where detailed information about this particular
printer can be found.
Printer Driver Installer
Specify a URL where the printer driver installer can be found.
Printer Make and Model
Type in the printer manufacturer name and model name.
More Printer Information
Manufacturer
Specify a URL where detailed information about the printer
manufacturer particular printer can be found.
Operations Supported
Use these settings to specify the IPP printing operations supported by the printer. Unchecking an item means that it is not
supported for IPP printing.
Document Format Supported
Put a check mark next to the document data formats that the
printer supports for IPP printing.
Document Format
Select the default document data format. The uses this data
format for IPP printing when no data format is specified by the
client.
Message from Operator
Type in a message from the printer administrator to users.
job-k-octets-supported
Specify, in kilo-octet units, the upper limit and lower limit of the
total job size that the printer can receive.
Apply button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Pi4700e
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
WINS Configuration
Network Settings
Chapter 3
This screen appears when you click the WINS Configuration menu on
the Network tab. It lets you change WINS settings. WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) makes it possible for a device, such as your network
interface card, to register a NetBIOS name (like MLT_995243) along with
its current IP address (like 192.9.200.200). A client wanting to contact the
printer uses the WINS server to match the NetBIOS name with an IP address. Most users will find it easier to remember the NetBIOS name for the
printer rather than its IP address.
Pi4700e
Password
Input the password assigned to the network interface card. The
initial factory default is sysadm. Clicking the Apply button after
inputting the wrong password displays a password error message without changing the settings.
NetBIOS Name
The NetBIOS name for the network interface card is shown on
this screen. The default NetBIOS name is the Network Interface Card’s serial number (for example, MLT_995243), unless
you previously configured a name for the network interface
card with DHCP.
You may change the NetBIOS name here, by entering a new
name. The name can be up to 15 characters long.
Primary WINS Server
If you previously configured a DHCP server to provide the network interface card with the IP address of the primary WINS
server, this item shows the address. Otherwise, enter the IP
address of the primary NetBIOS name server here.
Secondary WINS Server
You may also enter the IP address of a secondary NetBIOS
name server, if you want. If you configured your DHCP server
to provide the address of a secondary WINS server to the network interface card, the address fields are filled in with the appropriate information automatically.
3-33
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
Primary Server Logged in
Name of the Primary WINS Server to which the printer is currently logged in.
Secondary Server Logged
in
Name of the Secondary WINS Server to which the printer is
currently logged in.
Apply button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Chapter 3
After you configure the NetBIOS (WINS) settings, restart the printer.
Network Settings
The network interface card’s status page should now show that the network interface card is successfully registered with the WINS server. The
items labeled Primary Server Logged in and Secondary Server
Logged in on the WINS Configuration screen now indicate which WINS
server(s) the network interface card is registered with.
Under normal circumstances, your network interface card automatically
renews its registration with the WINS server before its lease expires.
Reset
This screen appears when you click the Reset menu on the Network tab.
Use this screen to reset the network interface card so new settings can
take effect.
3-34
Password
Input the password assigned to the network interface card. The
initial factory default is sysadm. Clicking the Apply button after
inputting the wrong password displays a password error message without changing the settings.
Reset button
Click this button to reset the network interface card.
Pi4700e
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
3
Maintenance
Network Settings
Chapter 3
This screen appears when you click the Maintenance menu on the Network tab. Use this screen to restore the network interface card to its initial
factory default settings.
Password
Input the password assigned to the network interface card. The
initial factory default is sysadm. Clicking the Apply button after
inputting the wrong password displays a password error message without changing the settings.
Restore Factory Defaults
Click the Restore button to restore the network interface card
to its initial factory defaults.
✎
Note
After performing a Reset or Maintenance, turn the digital copier off,
then on again.
Pi4700e
3-35
Specifying network settings from PageScope Light
Network Settings
Chapter 3
3
3-36
Pi4700e
Description of each tab
4
4
Properties Settings
4.1
Description of each tab
Each tab enables you to change the settings indicated below. For a detailed description of each function, see the corresponding reference page.
Setup
Allows you to set the paper take-up tray and paper exit
tray. Also allows you to set high level printing functions
such as two-sided printing, booklet creation, N-up printing, OHP interleaving, Watermark, Cover Mode, Staple,
Punch, and Folding.
p. 4-7
Paper
Allows you to set basic printing items such as number of
copies, paper size, print orientation and print zoom ratio.
Also allows you to set functions related to sorting.
p. 4-16
Quality
Allows you to set general items related to graphics, such
as resolution, halftone processing and image processing method.
Also allows you to set TrueType fonts.
p. 4-21
Device Options
Setting
Allows you to set option equipment installed on the machine.
p. 4-2
Job Management
Sets the copy track function.
Allows you to lock a printing job.
Also allows you to print the distribution number.
p. 4-24
PostScript (PS
driver only
Allows you to make detailed settings related to PostScript.
p. 4-31
–
Allows you to save and read the contents of the settings
on a Setup, Paper, Quality, Job Management, Device
Options Setting or PostScript tab.
p. 4-5
✎
Note
Refer to Chapter 2 for the procedure for displaying Properties.
Note that different settings must be made for each driver.
The differences between each driver are indicated based on the PCL6
version driver for Windows 98.
Details of OS-dependent functions are not given.
Pi4700e
4-1
Properties Settings
Outline of settings that can be changed
Chapter 4
Reference
page
Property tab
Device Options Setting tab
4
4.2
Device Options Setting tab
This tab allows you to set the options installed on the machine. Make sure
you select the options correctly. Otherwise, some functions may be unusable or printing errors may occur. The settings must match the machine
configuration.
PCL6 version
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(1)
(3)
PS version
(1)
(2)
(3)
4-2
Pi4700e
Device Options Setting tab
Device Options
Set the options installed in the machine.
This is a list of installable options. Select the desired
options from this list.
Available settings:
Dup+2way Tray, Dup+LCC, Duplex Cabinet, LCT,
Mailbin Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher, Single-staple
Finisher, Folding Finisher, Hard Disk Drive in Copier
• Add
Pressing this button adds the selected option.
• Remove
Pressing this button removes the selected option.
• Installed Options
This is a list of currently installed options. Select it when
you wish to remove an option.
• Mailbox Setting
<when Mailbin Finisher is installed>
You can add a name to each mailbin of Mailbin Finisher.
For details, see page 4-4.
(2)
User Name
The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the machine’s touch panel.
Setting range: 8 characters max.
(3)
About…
Click to display the manufacturer and version number of the printer driver.
✎
Note
If the Dup+2way Tray, Duplex Cabinet, and Dup+LCC are not correctly selected, it may not be possible to select the Finisher correctly.
Pi4700e
4-3
Chapter 4
• Installable Options
Properties Settings
(1)
4
Device Options Setting tab
4
Mailbox Setting dialog box
<when Mailbin Finisher is installed>
Allows you to set the names of the mailbins in Mailbin Finisher.
(1)
(2)
Chapter 4
(3)
Properties Settings
(1)
MailBox
This is the bin name editing box.
Setting range:
4-4
max. 20 characters (PCL6)
max. 32 characters (PS)
(2)
Apply
Press to finalize a changed name.
(3)
Bin list
Displays a list of names of currently set bins.
To change the name of a bin, select the name you wish to change.
Pi4700e
Functions common to various tabs
4.3
4
Functions common to various tabs
These functions are common to tabs from the Setup tab to the Job Management tab and also the Overlay tab or the PostScript tab.
(2)
(1)
(2)
Pi4700e
Easy Set
Allows you to call and use the settings stored in each tab.
• Easy Set Name
Allows you to call the settings stored in each tab.
• Save (Delete)
Used to save/delete the settings of tabs.When you
touch the Save button to save the contents of a tab, the
Save Easy Set Name dialog box appears. For details,
see page 4-6.
When you touch Delete, the stored set contents are deleted.
Paper preview/Machine preview
Allows you to display/change over the paper preview and machine preview.
• Page Layout
The layout of the printed data on a single page is displayed as an image. This allows you to check the status
for N-up printing and two-sided printing, for example.
See page 12-12 for the Page Layout list.
• Printer Figure
When the paper take-up tray and the paper exit tray are
set, the paper take-up tray and paper exit tray are displayed in green.
See page 12-15 for the Printer Figure list.
4-5
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(1)
Functions common to various tabs
4
✎
Note for (1)
Depending on environment used, contents of Save/Delete will be different: Refer to Appendix A for details. (p. 12-9).
Watermark, Custom Paper, Mailbox Name, and Font Substitution Table are not set.
✎
Tips for (1)
If the set contents have changed, the Save button will appear.
Chapter 4
If the set contents are the Easy Name contents, the Delete button will
appear.
Functions of the Save Easy Set Name dialog box
Use to save print setting data.
Properties Settings
Before pressing the Save button, be sure to set the contents of each tab.
(1)
(1)
4-6
Easy Set Name
Add a name to the stored contents.
Number of registrations
Depending on environment used, number of registrations will be different: Refer to Appendix A for details
(p. 12-9).
Number of characters
max. 10 characters
Pi4700e
Setup tab
4.4
4
Setup tab
This tab allows you to set the paper take-up tray, paper exit tray and various high grade printing functions.
PCL6 version
(1)
(3)
Properties Settings
(4)
PS version
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Pi4700e
Chapter 4
(2)
4-7
Setup tab
4
✎
Note
With the PS driver, the Watermark option is included on the Setup tab.
For details, refer to “Overlay tab” on page 4-27.
(1)
N-up
Outputs multiple originals on one sheet of paper.
• N-up
Set the N-up number.
Available settings: Off, 2up, 4up, 6up, 9up, 16up
Sets the layout border
• N-up Style
Sets the printing layout
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
• Border line
Horiz.
Ascending
(2)
(3)
4-8
Horiz.
Descending
Vert.
Ascending
Vert.
Descending
Duplex / Booklet <when Dup + 2way Tray, Dup + LCC or Duplex Cabinet is installed>
Specifies two-sided printing and Booklet printing.
• Off
Not set
• Short Edge Binding
Two-sided printing takes place so that the short edge is
bound.
• Long Edge Binding
Two-sided printing takes place so that the long edge is
bound.
• Booklet Left Binding
Four pages are printed on both sides of a single sheet
of paper so that when the sheet is folded in the middle
it forms a booklet (left bound).
• Booklet Right Binding
Four pages are printed on both sides of a single sheet
of paper so that when the sheet is folded in the middle
it forms a booklet (right bound).
Paper Source
Selects the machine tray to be used.
Sets the cover page function and the OHP interleaving function.
• Paper Source
Select the machine tray to be used.
The selectable paper sizes are limited by the types of
paper take-up trays installed in the machine.
Available settings:
Auto, Manual Feed, Tray1 to 4, LCC, LCT
• Detail of Paper Source
Set the cover page function and OHP interleaving function. For details, see page 4-11.
Pi4700e
Setup tab
4
(4)
Output Setting
This function selects the tray in the machine to which the paper is to be distributed.
Settings can also be made for finishing functions including stapling, hole punching,
and folding.
• Paper exit destination
Select the machine tray to which you wish to distribute
the prints. The selectable paper exit trays are limited by
the type of finisher installed in the machine.
Mailbin Finisher
Except Mailbin Finisher
• Mailbin paper exit destination
If Mailbin is selected as the paper exit destination, set
the mailbin to which you wish to distribute the paper.
• Detail of Output Setting
Set stapling, punching or folding. For details, see
page 4-13.
✎
Tip for (1)
The printing layout is displayed on the Page Layout.
✎
Notes for (2)
If you print a document that contains pages of different sizes and/or
different directions in the same job, the image may be partially cut or
images may overlap each other.
Two-sided printing and OHP interleaving cannot be set simultaneously.
✎
Tips for (2)
The sizes for which you can perform two-sided printing are from 140 ×
182 mm to 297 × 432 mm.
Short Edge Binding, Long Edge Biding, Booklet Left Binding and
Booklet Right Binding are displayed on the Page Layout.
✎
Note for (3)
Some paper sizes cannot be selected. For details, refer to the User
Manual of the machine.
Pi4700e
4-9
Properties Settings
Note for (1)
If you print a document that contains pages of different sizes and/or
different directions in the same job, the image may be partially cut or
images may overlap each other.
Chapter 4
✎
Setup tab
4
✎
Tips for (3)
Set the paper take-up tray using Device Options Setting.
The paper take-up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
✎
Note for (4)
Some paper sizes cannot be selected. For details, refer to the User
Manual of the machine.
Chapter 4
✎
Tips for (4)
Set the type of finisher using Device Options Setting.
Properties Settings
The paper take-up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
4-10
Pi4700e
Setup tab
4
Functions of the Detail of Paper Source dialog box
(2)
(1)
Cover Page
This function is used to print a document with front and back cover pages. You can
print on the front cover, or leave it blank.
(2)
• Front Cover Page
Activates the front cover function.
• with Image (Front Cover
Page)
Prints on the front cover.
• Back Cover Page
Adds a back cover.
• with Image (Back Cover
Page)
Prints on the back cover.
• Cover Paper Source
Select the tray for the front cover and back cover papers.
Available settings: Manual Feed, Tray1 to Tray4, LCC,
LCT
Interleaving Paper
This function inserts sheets (interleaving sheets) between sheets of OHP film when
printing on OHP film. You can either leave these sheets blank or print the same image
as that printed on the OHP film.
• OHP Interleaving
Activates the OHP interleaving function.
• with Image
Prints an image on the interleaving sheet.
• Interleaving Paper
Source
Select the tray for the interleaving paper.
Available settings: Tray1 toTray4, LCC, LCT
✎
Notes for (1)
When using special paper, such as thick paper, the paper sometimes
fails to be distributed to the selected paper exit destination.
You can set Manual Feed, Tray1 to Tray4, LCC and LCT using Paper
Source.
Pi4700e
4-11
Properties Settings
(1)
Chapter 4
This function sets the cover page function and the OHP interleaving function.
Setup tab
4
✎
Tip for (1)
The tray containing the paper on which the body of the document is to
be printed is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
✎
Notes for (2)
When using the OHP interleaving function, set the number of sets of
prints to “1”.
Chapter 4
You cannot select the same paper take-up port for both Paper Source
and Interleaving Paper Source.
You can set Manual Feed only using Paper Source.
OHP interleaving and two-sided printing cannot be set simultaneously.
Properties Settings
✎
Tip for (2)
The OHP film tray is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
4-12
Pi4700e
Setup tab
4
Functions of the Detail Of Output Setting dialog box
Settings can be made for finishing functions including stapling, hole
punching, and folding.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Pi4700e
Staple <when Mailbin Finisher, Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
This function allows you to staple one set of printed documents at a time.
• Off
Printed documents are not stapled.
• Corner staple
Printed documents are stapled at their corners.
• Long Edge
<when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
The documents are stapled along the long edge.
• Short edge
<when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
The documents are stapled along the short edge.
• Center
<when Folding Finisher is installed>
The documents are stapled at the center.
Punch <when Mailbin Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
This function allows you to punch holes in the printed document.
• Off
The document is not punched.
• Short Edge
The document is punched along the short edge.
• Long Edge
The document is punched along the long edge
• Punch Holes
<Inch area only>
Set the number of holes to be punched.
Folding <when Folding Finisher is installed>
Select the desired paper folding function.
• Off
Printed pages are not folded.
• Just Output Size [ZFold]
Printed pages are folded into three parts.
• Half Folding
Printed pages are folded in two at their center.
• Crease
A crease is made in printed pages.
4-13
Properties Settings
(1)
Chapter 4
(2)
Setup tab
4
✎
Notes for (1)
If Staple is set, printed pages are fed out into the Elevator Tray.
The stapling position is either the top left corner or the top right corner
depending upon the direction of the paper and the printing direction.
If the capacity of Mailbin Finisher, Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple
Finisher or Folding Finisher is exceeded, the stapling operation may
be canceled. Refer to the User Manual of the machine.
Chapter 4
Take care when printing a document consisting of pages facing different directions, since the stapling position will be determined by the direction of the first page.
Properties Settings
If you print a document consisting of pages of different sizes in the
same printing job, stapling may be canceled.
Only Center Staple can be set with Booklet.
You cannot set certain sizes or kinds of paper. For details, refer to the
User Manual of the machine.
✎
Tip for (1)
You can check the stapling positions using the icons in the dialog box.
✎
Notes for (2)
Number of punch holes can be specified only when Multi-staple Finisher is installed.
Punch Holes is not displayed for Metric area.
You cannot punch certain sizes of paper. Also, you may be unable to
punch the paper at certain positions. For details, refer to the User Manual of the machine.
If you select Long Edge in the manual bypass take-up mode, the paper
may sometimes fail to be punched.
Punch and OHP interleaving cannot be set simultaneously.
Punch and Booklet cannot be set simultaneously.
4-14
Pi4700e
Setup tab
4
✎
Tip for (2)
The punching positions are displayed on the icons in the dialog box.
✎
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
Note for (3)
If Folding is combined with Hole-Punch or Staple, the Hole-Punch or
Staple function to be used is restricted depending on the specific type
of the Folding function combined. For details, see Appendix A
(page 12-1) for details.
Pi4700e
4-15
Paper tab
4
4.5
Paper tab
The Paper tab allows you to make basic printer settings.
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(5)
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
4-16
Original Document Size
Sets the original size.
• Paper size
Select the original size.
Available settings:
Letter, Legal, Executive, A3, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS
B5, JIS B6, Invoice, 11 × 17, 11 × 14, FLS1, FLS2,
FLS3, FLS4, Special sizes
• Edit Custom
Used to set a special size. For details, see page 4-19.
Output Paper Size
Sets the size of the paper on which prints are to be made.
• Output Paper Size
Activates the specification of the size of printing paper.
(Displayed only with the PS driver)
• Paper size
Select the size of the printing paper.
Available settings:
Letter, Legal, Executive, A3, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS
B5, JIS B6, Invoice, 11 × 17, 11 × 14, FLS2, FLS3,
FLS4, Special size
• Fit to Paper
The prints are output at a zoom ratio that matches the
size of the printing paper.
• Scaling
Specify the print zoom ratio.
Setting range: 25 to 400%
Copies
Specify the number of sets of prints to be made. Enter the value either directly or by
pressing ▲ or ▼.
Setting range: 1 to 999 sets
Pi4700e
Paper tab
4
(6)
• Uncollated
All of the pages are printed one after the other. For example, if you make five sets of prints, each page is
printed in sequence five copies at a time.
• Collated
Prints are output one set at a time. For example, if you
make five sets of prints of a 10-page document, the
prints will be output one set at a time.
Sorting
Select the sorting method.
• Unsorted
Prints are not sorted.
• Sorted
Prints are sorted.
Orientation
Select the orientation of the image. You can check the selected direction using Page
Layout.
• Portrait
Printing takes place lengthwise.
• Landscape
Printing takes place crosswise.
✎
Note for (1)
Depending on environment used, contents of Save/Delete will be different: Refer to Appendix A (p. 12-11) for details.
✎
Notes for (2)
If you select a size of paper not loaded in the machine or Manual Feed,
the machine will give a message prompting you to add paper to Tray1,
Tray2, or the manual bypass port and enter into a standby state.
If the setting made in Original Document Size does not match the
size specified in the application with Fit to Paper selected, the machine takes the paper size set in the application.
Fit to Paper cannot be selected if Custom Paper is selected in Original Document Size.
✎
Note for (3)
When using the OHP interleaving function, set the number of sets of
prints to 1.
✎
Note for (4)
Keep Collate (Sort) on the application side set to “OFF” at all times.
Pi4700e
4-17
Chapter 4
(5)
Collate
Use this function when making multiple sets of prints of the same document, to specify whether or not to print one set at a time.
Properties Settings
(4)
Paper tab
4
✎
Tips for (5)
If you output prints to the Elevator Tray when the Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher is installed, the prints are
output in a sawtooth manner.
When the Folding Finisher is installed or if none of the finishing options
is installed, the prints are output in a criss-cross manner.
The following are the minimum requirements for permitting criss-cross
sorting using the Collated setting:
Chapter 4
Stacks of paper of the same size are loaded in the lengthwise
and crosswise directions.
The Staple, Punch or Cover mode is not set.
When Collated is selected, Sorting is dimmed.
Properties Settings
✎
Tip for (6)
A Portrait or Landscape print appears on the Page Layout.
4-18
Pi4700e
Paper tab
4
Functions of the Edit Custom Paper or Custom Paper dialog
box
The name of the dialog box is Custom Paper for PCL6, Edit Custom Paper
for PS.
Use this dialog box to set special sizes of paper.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Paper Name
Select the paper name from the Custom Paper list.
(2)
New...
This function allows you to set a special size of paper. When it is selected, the dialog
box changes to the Custom Paper Setting Dialog Box.
Depending on environment used, number of registrations will be different: Refer to Appendix A (p. 12-11) for
details.
(3)
Edit...
Edits Custom Paper selected in (1). When it is selected, the dialog box changes to
the Custom Paper Setting Dialog Box.
(4)
Delete
Deletes Custom Paper selected in (1).
4-19
Properties Settings
(1)
Number of registrations
Pi4700e
Chapter 4
(4)
Paper tab
4
Custom Paper Setting dialog box
(PCL 6 version)
Edit Custom Paper Setting dialog
box (PS version)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(5)
Chapter 4
(6)
(5)
Name
Enter the Name of the Custom Paper
Setting range:
Properties Settings
(6)
Max 20 characters
Size
Set the paper size.
Setting range:
(7)
4-20
Width:
4 to 11 11/16 (Unit = inch)
100 to 297 (Unit = mm)
Height:
5 13/16 to 17 (Unit = inch)
148 to 432 (Unit = mm)
Unit
Switches input units of paper size between inch and metric.
Pi4700e
Quality tab
4.6
4
Quality tab
PCL6 version
(2)
(1)
Resolution
Select the printing resolution.
Setting range: 600 × 600 dpi
(2)
Smoothing
Correct the edges of the printed image.
Available settings: On, Off
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(1)
✎
Note for (2)
This function is used with a document whose contents are mainly text.
Using the function with a photo image could even dirty the produced
image.
Pi4700e
4-21
Quality tab
4
PS version
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(3)
4-22
(1)
Resolution
Refer to PCL6 version.
(2)
Smoothing
Refer to PCL6 version.
(3)
Brightness
Perform brightness adjustment.
Setting range: 0 to100
(4)
Half Toning...
Specify the method of dithering to express gray.
(5)
Reversal
Specify reversal, Negative or Mirror, or both.
• Negative
Reverses black and white.
• Mirror
Reverses left and right.
Pi4700e
Quality tab
4
Functions of the Halftoning dialog box
(1)
(2)
(1)
Pi4700e
Halftoning
Select the method to set halftones.
• User Printer’s settings
Uses the setting value of the printer when the halftone
image is printed. This setting is normally recommended.
• Use settings below
Uses the optional setting value (the setting of optional
value) instead of the setting value of the printer when
the halftone image is printed. If a moire pattern occurs
using Use printer’s settings, you should print with adjusting Screen frequency and Screen angle.
(2)
Screen frequency
Set the number of lines on the screen.
Setting range: 0.1 to 999.9 (in 0.1 steps)
(3)
Screen angle
Set the screen angle: 0 to 360° (in 0.1° steps)
4-23
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(3)
Job Management tab
4
4.7
Job Management tab
PCL6 version
(1)
(2)
(4)
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(3)
PS version
(1)
(2)
(3)
4-24
Pi4700e
Job Management tab
(3)
(4)
• Account Code
Makes the copy track function valid.
• Access Number
Enter the access number set in the machine.
Setting range: 0002 to 9999 (4 digits)
Lock Job
Check this box when locking a printing job.
When using Lock Job, set a password in Password.
A locked printing job will be printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on
the panel of the machine. In this case, a password is necessary.
• Lock Job
Make the lock job function valid.
• Password
Enter the password of the lock job.
Setting range: 0000 to 9999 (4 digits)
Distribution <when Hard Disk Drive in Copier is installed>
Specifies adding a distribution in the background during printing, and also sets the
conditions for adding distribution number. A distribution number is added for each set
of prints.
• Distribution Number
Select the distribution number function.
• 1st Page Only
Select whether to print the distribution number on only
the first page, or on all pages.
• Starting Number
Specify the starting number of the distribution numbers
to be printed.
Setting range: 001 to 999
Job Owner
• Default User Name
The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as
the job user name on the machine’s touch panel.
Setting range: 8 characters max
✎
Note for (1)
To clear the Account Code function when PCL6 is used, type any
number in the Access Number box. If no number is typed in the Access Number box, the message “Access Number Error” will appear
and you might not be able to exit from the function.
✎
Note for (2)
To clear the Lock Job function when PCL6 is used, type any number
in the Password box. If no number is typed in the Password box, the
message “Password Error” will appear and you might not be able to
exit from the function.
Pi4700e
4-25
Chapter 4
(2)
Account Code
Check this box when using the copy track function. An account code is attached to
each printing job, enabling you to carry out management at the machine. In order to
use this function, copy track function must be set at the machine.
When the copy track function is set at the machine, printing may sometimes fail to
take place until the access number designated at the machine is correctly set.
Properties Settings
(1)
4
Job Management tab
4
✎
Notes for (3)
When using this function in combination with the cover page function,
if you set printing of the cover page to “No” using the cover page function, and set serial number printing to “Yes”, a distribution number will
be printed on the cover page.
The orientation of the screen sometimes fails to match the orientation
of the distribution number.
✎
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
Tip for (3)
When the distribution number reaches 999, the next number returns to
000.
4-26
Pi4700e
Overlay tab
4.8
4
Overlay tab
This tab is only displayed with the PCL driver.
(1)
Watermark
Prints a specific word in the background as a watermark.
• Text
Select the word to be entered as the watermark from
the list.
Available settings:
NONE, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY,
DRAFT, FINAL, PROOF, TOP SECRET, or a word set
by the user
• 1st Page Only
Select whether to insert a watermark on only the first
page or on all pages.
• Edit Watermark
Set the format, position, and so on, of the watermark
characters. For details, see page 4-28.
✎
Notes
When using this function together with the cover page function, if you
set printing to None with the cover page function and choose setting
to print a watermark on only the first page, the watermark will be printed on the second page.
This function may not operate with some applications.
Depending on environment used, contents of Save/Delete will be different: Refer to Appendix A (p. 12-10) for details.
Pi4700e
4-27
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(1)
Overlay tab
4
✎
Tip
The condition of the watermark is displayed on the Page Layout.
Functions of the Watermark dialog box
Chapter 4
This dialog box allows you to set the text to be inserted using the Watermark function, and also the text style.
(1)
Properties Settings
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
Preview
This is the watermark preview.
(2)
Name
Select a registered watermark from the list.
Available settings:
4-28
<NONE>, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DRAFT, FINAL,
PROOF, TOP SECRET, DO NOT COPY, user setting
(3)
New
Used to create new text.
When you select this item, a dialog box for making detailed settings appears.
(4)
Edit...
Used to edit text selected in (2).
When you select this item, a dialog box for making detailed settings appears.
(5)
Delete...
Deletes text selected in (2).
Pi4700e
Overlay tab
4
Watermark detailed settings
(6)
(7)
(1)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(6)
(7)
Name
Enter the name under which you wish to register the watermark.
Number of registrations
Depending on environment used, number of registrations will be different: Refer to Appendix A (p. 12-10) for
details.
Number of characters
max. 20 characters
String
Enter the text to be printed as a watermark.
Number of characters
(8)
(9)
Type Face
Face Specify a font from String to be printed as a watermark.
PCL6
Specify a font from the fonts (PC font) installed in the
OS.
PS
Specify a font from device fonts (controller font).
Size
Specify the font size of the characters.
Setting range
(10)
(11)
8pt to 200 pt (in 1pt steps)
Style
Specify the font style of the characters.
• Bold
Prints bold characters.
• Italic
Prints italic characters.
Shading
Specify the density of the characters.
Setting range
Pi4700e
PCL6: max. 63 characters
PS: max. 255 characters
5% to 100% (in 5% steps)
4-29
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(13)
Overlay tab
4
(12)
Angle
Specify the angle of the characters with respect to the paper.
• Fixed Angle
Standard fixed angle of the driver.
Available settings:
• User Setting
If you select User Setting from Fixed Angle, you can set
any desired angle.
Setting range:
Chapter 4
(13)
Horizontal, Diagonal, Vertical,
User Setting
-180°to +180° (A – (minus)
value rotates the characters
clockwise, 0 leaves the characters parallel to the paper,
and a + (plus) value rotates
the characters counterclockwise.)
Position
Specify the position at which you wish to print a watermark.
• Center
The watermark is printed at the center of the paper.
• User Setting
You can specify a position by entering numbers in the
Horizontal and Vertical boxes.
Setting values:
Horizontal:
-999pt to 999pt (in 1pt steps)
Vertical:
-999pt to 999pt (in 1pt steps)
(72pt = 1inch)
Properties Settings
✎
Tips
Specify the position from the center. The Horizontal positive direction
is to the right, and the Vertical position direction is upward.
You can check the set contents using (1) Preview.
4-30
Pi4700e
PostScript tab
4.9
4
PostScript tab
This tab enables you to set all items related to PostScript.
(1)
(5)
(1)
(2)
Pi4700e
(7)
PostScript output
Set the output format of PostScript.
• PostScript (optimize for
speed)
Performs optimization for faster printing processing.
• PostScript (optimized
for portability-ADSC)
Performs optimization for reducing error.
• Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
Select this item when you wish to embed this file as an
image in a document that is to be printed using a different program.
• Archive format
Saves the data stream of PostScript to a file.
Postscript header
Set the method of sending the header.
• Download header with
each print job
This item sends header information each time a document is printed. We recommend that you use this setting when sharing a network printer.
• Assume header is
downloaded and retained
Sends header information only once to the printer, in
order to shorten the printing time.
• Send Header Now
Sends header information to the controller.
(3)
Print PostScript error information
Set the PostScript error information printing.
(4)
Compress bitmap images
Send graphics in compressed form.
4-31
Properties Settings
(6)
(3)
(4)
Chapter 4
(2)
PostScript tab
4
Fonts
Set TrueType font.
• Send TrueType fonts to
printer according to the
Font Substitution Table
Replaces TrueType fonts for the printer fonts, or downloads TrueType fonts in accordance with the Font Substitution Table. For editing the Font Substitution Table,
you should open the “Properties...” from the Control
Panel and select “Edit the Table” button.
• Edit the Table
Sets the Font Substitution Table.
• Always use PostScript
fonts instead of TrueType fonts
Always prints replacing TrueType fonts for the printer
fonts. The printing speed becomes faster, but the printed result may not be the same as the display.
• Always use TrueType
fonts
Always prints downloading TrueType Fonts to the printer. The printed result will be the same as the display,
but the printing speed becomes slower.
(6)
Send Fonts As...
Sets sending method of fonts.
(7)
Advanced...
Performs detailed settings of PostScript.
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(5)
4-32
Pi4700e
PostScript tab
4
Functions of the Font Substitution Table dialog box
(1)
Pi4700e
(1)
For this TrueType font
Used to display and select the substitution table settings.
(2)
Printer font for
Select the substitution printer font.
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(2)
4-33
PostScript tab
4
Functions of the Send Fonts As dialog box
(1)
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(2)
4-34
(1)
TrueType fonts
Select the method of sending TrueType fonts.
Available settings: Don’t Send, Outlines, Bitmaps, Type42
(2)
Set the reference font size of the TrueType font for changing over from a Bitmap font
to an Outline font.
Setting range: 0 to 999 pixels
Pi4700e
PostScript tab
4
Functions of the Advanced PostScript dialog box
(1)
(1)
PostScript language level
Selects PostScript language level.
Set Value
2: PostScript level 2
3: PostScript level 3
(2)
Pi4700e
Data format
Sets data format of PostScript.
• ASCII data
Transmits the data in the ASCII format (7-bit). When
you select this format, it takes more time for transmission, but any I/O channel, such as the parallel port or
the network port, is available.
• Tagged binary communications protocol (TBCP)
Transmits the data in the binary format (8-bit). When
the data is transmitted from the parallel port, it can be
transmitted faster than in the ASCII format. This binary
format is not available when you use the option for the
archiving form or create the EPS file.
• Send CTRL+D before
job
Transmits Ctrl+D before job.
• Send CTRL+D after job
Transmits Ctrl+D after job.
4-35
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
(2)
Conflicts dialog box
4
Conflicts dialog box
Properties Settings
Chapter 4
4.10
When the Conflicts dialog box appears, it shows the settings that could not
be combined with each other. Check the details, and click the Resolve
button or the Cancel button to quit.
✎
Note
Some settings, which are defied by the machine for the restricted combinations of different functions, can at times be accepted by the printer
driver. If a print command is issued from the personal computer with
such settings made, the machine does not produce the output correctly or abandons the job to produce nothing. Make sure that you make
correct settings.
✎
Tip
The dialog box looks slightly differently from this one when Device Options Setting is being set or the PS driver is being used.
4-36
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
5
5
Printer Driver for Linux
5.1
Installing the printer driver
Operating environment
This section explains the required environment for the printer driver.
Before installing the printer driver, make sure that your computer meets
the following requirements. If it does not, the printer driver may not function properly.
Personal computer
IBM PC or a compatible with a Pentium
200MHz or higher CPU
Operating system
Redhat Linux ver.6.1, 6.2
Turbo Linux ver.4.0, 6.0
Open Linux ver. 2.3, 2.4
SuSE Linux ver. 6.3, 6.4
64MB or more
Parallel
Network
Free space on hard disk
Chapter 5
I/O interface
Centronics interface
(Conforming to IEEE1284)
10/100 Base-T (UTP)
2MB or more under /opt
In this section, installation procedure is explained, referring to Redhat
Linux. If a different procedure is used (depending on each OS), explanation is separately given for that section.
Pi4700e
5-1
Printer Driver for Linux
Memory
Installing the printer driver
5
Installation
This section explains the installation procedure.
X window System is described here.
✎
Note
Before installing the printer driver, quit all other applications.
1 Log in with root when starting OS.
2 Start Terminal window.
3 Install the controller Driver CD-ROM provided with controller in the
CD-ROM drive of your personal computer.
4 Copy RPM file to optional directory. The file has been stored in “/Linux/
Chapter 5
PrintUtility” of the CD-ROM.
5 Input the following command to Terminal window and execute:
# rpm –ivh diutil_pack_file
✎
Printer Driver for Linux
Note
Input file name to “diutil_pack_file”.
6 Installation will start when the above command has been executed.
✎
Note
The installation procedure shown above cannot be used for the following Operating Systems. Use the installation procedure given on the
next page:
Open Linux ver. 2.4
SuSE Linux ver. 6.4
5-2
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
5
After installation is complete, the screen shown below will appear.
If an error is output during installation, execute the following commands in
sequence:
# rpm -ivh diutil_pack_file --nodeps
# ln -s /usr/lib/libtcl8.0.so /usr/lib/libtcl.so
# ldconfig -n /usr/lib/
# ldconfig -n /usr/X11R6/lib/
✎
Note
Input file name to “diutil_pack_file”.
By executing the above commands in sequence, installation can be performed correctly.
Pi4700e
5-3
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
# ln -s /usr/lib/libtk8.0.so /usr/X11R6/lib/libtk.so
Printer setting with X window System
5
5.2
Printer setting with X window System
Making general settings before using the printer
The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print
jobs, including the port to which the printer cable is connected and any optional devices configured with the machine: Note that these settings must
be made only after the printer driver has been installed.
See page 5-19 if you refer to Device Options Setting in dialog box.
Redhat Linux
With Redhat Linux, setting is performed from Printer Configuration in the
control panel. The following shows how to display Printer Configuration:
✎
Chapter 5
Tip
With Redhat Linux, Printer Configuration window can also be displayed by executing printtool command from Terminal window.
1 Click menu button and open System – Control Panel.
2 When control panel is opened, click the Printer Configuration button.
Printer Driver for Linux
Printer system manager will open.
3 First, click the Add button of the printer manager.
5-4
Pi4700e
Printer setting with X window System
5
4 When the personal computer has been directly connected to the machine, select Local Printer.
✎
To the network administrator: When the setting of the driver is to be
selected via network with Remote Printer, Remote Unix (1pd) Queue,
etc., printer queue, printer name, IP address, etc. are necessary. Input
“PORT1” for printer queue.
Printer Driver for Linux
5 The printer device will be detected. Click the OK button.
If not detected, check to see if the port is already in use.
Pi4700e
Chapter 5
Note
If you install a printer driver to the computer which has been connected
via network, be sure to consult the network administrator.
5-5
Printer setting with X window System
5
✎
Note
When network connection has been selected, detection result dialog
box will not be output.
6 Edit screen will open. First, set optional printer name.
7 Specify the SPOOL directory to be prepared: It is acceptable to leave
default value as it is.
8 Click the Select button of input filter, and select PostScript Printer
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
here. No other settings are required.
9 Click the OK button.
10 Click the OK button in edit window of the printer to complete setting.
5-6
Pi4700e
Printer setting with X window System
5
Turbo Linux
With Turbo Linux, execute command from Terminal window for setting
printer. The following shows the display method of the setting screen:
1 First, execute turboprintcfg command from Terminal window: Terminal window will change to printer setting screen.
Chapter 5
2 Select the Add button.
Printer Driver for Linux
3 Select Local Printer for printer type.
✎
Note
When network printer is to be used, select Remote LPD Queue.
Pi4700e
5-7
Printer setting with X window System
5
4 Specify optional name for printer queue.
5 Make sure that positions where SPOOL directory is to be prepared
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
and printer device are specified. After checking is complete, select the
OK button.
✎
Note
When setting is performed using network printer, LPD setting (Remote
Hostname, Remote Queue) should be made in addition to above setting. Input “PORT1” for Remote Queue.
With Turbo Linux4.0, some other setting should be made on Edit Printer Setting screen. For setting of printer type, select Postscript Printer. Other settings can be left as default settings.
5-8
Pi4700e
Printer setting with X window System
5
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
6 Select the Save & Exit button to complete setting.
Pi4700e
5-9
Printer setting with X window System
5
Open Linux
With Open Linux, printer setting can be performed using dialog box. The
setting method using dialog box is given here.
1 Open KDE menu. Select COAS – Peripherals – Printer.
Chapter 5
The dialog box shown below will appear.
2 Select Add from Printer at the left top on the dialog box.
3 Select printer model dialog box will appear. Select Generic post-
Printer Driver for Linux
script printer.
✎
Note
Whenever network printer is to be used, select Generic remote printer. At this time, input “PORT1” for Remote Queue.
5-10
Pi4700e
Printer setting with X window System
5
4 Printer name dialog box will appear: Input optional name and click the
OK button.
5 Printer attributes dialog box will appear: Make certain that correct de-
6 Select the OK button.
7 System will ask you whether to save changes, to create printer queue,
etc.: Select the OK button.
8 Return to Printer Configuration dialog box. Once the added printer is
displayed, select the OK button to complete.
Pi4700e
5-11
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
vice is displayed here, but do not change any other items.
Printer setting with X window System
5
SuSE Linux
With SuSE Linux, command should be executed from Terminal window to
set printer.
1 Execute command shown below from Terminal window with current
directory:
# /var/lib/apsfilter/SETUP
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
Terminal window will change as shown below after execution of command.
2 Screen will change as shown below by pressing the return key. Select
Entry – Device.
5-12
Pi4700e
Printer setting with X window System
5
3 Printer interface setting screen will appear. Select Parallel.
Note
When network is used, select Remote instead of Parallel. Then, set
HostName and printer queue. Input “PORT1” for printer queue.
Printer Driver for Linux
4 Make sure that Interface is set to parallel port.
Chapter 5
✎
Pi4700e
5-13
Printer setting with X window System
5
5 Screen for specifying each setting will appear. Select Postscript for
printer type.
Chapter 5
Screen will change to resolution setting screen, but it is not necessary
to change from default value.
Printer Driver for Linux
6 Specify printer name, paper and color.
5-14
Pi4700e
Printer setting with X window System
5
7 Select the Add button for complete. Confirmation screen will appear.
Input the following command on the Terminal window and execute: The
dialog box will appear.
# /opt/diutil/bin/didialog –m [Model name] –P [Printer name] –a [Area]
G
Specify the printer name which was designated during setting.
G
Input model name (di550) for [Model name].
G
Specify [Area]; select [us] for Inch area, [ec] for Metric area.
Refer to “5.3 Properties settings” (p. 5-18) for setting method concerning
the printing.
✎
Tip
Specifying [Model name] and [Area] is necessary only when didialog
command is executed first.
Pi4700e
5-15
Printer Driver for Linux
If you use X window, printer utility setting can be specified from dialog box.
Dialog box can be displayed only with command operation, so didialog
command is used here.
Chapter 5
How to display Printer Utility dialog box
Printer setting with X window System
5
dipjl command
dipjl command is a printer setting command used for environment in
which X window cannot be used: Refer to “dipj1.1” file in “/opt/diutil/man/
manl” for detailed description. To display “man” file, execute the following
command:
# man /opt/diutil/man/manl/dipj1.1
✎
Note
If you are able to use X window environment, this command is not necessary.
Since the settings using this command are only temporary settings for
printing, they cannot be saved.
Printing method (dilpr command)
Chapter 5
dilpr command is used for printing method. Printing of PS file is performed
by executing this command. Note that this cannot be printed from application. Refer to “dilpr.1” file in “/opt/diutil/man/manl” for detailed description.
To display “man” file, execute the following command.
# man /opt/diutil/man/manl/dilpr.1
Printer Driver for Linux
Example option of dilpr command
-P printer name: Specifies printer name
-y set option: Used when a particular part of set option is to be changed.
-J Job name: Set when a name other than file name is to be set as a job
name.
Example of printing method
# /opt/diutil/bin/dilpr –P [Printer name] [File name]
✎
Note
With this command, only PS file can be printed. Non-PS files must be
converted to PS for printing.
groff command, etc. can be used to convert to PS file.
5-16
Pi4700e
Printer setting with X window System
5
didialog command
didialog command is used to display dialog box for setting printer utility.
Refer to “didialog” file in “/opt/diutil/man/manl” for detailed description. To
display “man” file, execute the following command:
# man /opt/diutil/man/manl/didialog.1
Example of dialog box display method
# /opt/diutil/bin/didialog –m [Model name] –P [Printer name] –a [Area]
✎
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
Tip
Specifying [Model name] and [Area] is necessary only when didialog
command is executed first.
Pi4700e
5-17
Properties settings
5
5.3
Properties settings
Description of each tab
Chapter 5
Each tab enables you to change the settings indicated below. For a detailed description of each function, see the corresponding reference page.
Property tab
Outline of settings that can be changed
Reference page
Setup
Allows you to set the paper take-up tray and paper exit tray.
Also allows you to set high level printing functions
such as two-sided printing, OHP interleaving,
Cover Mode, Staple, Punch, and Folding.
p. 5-23
Paper
Allows you to set basic printing items such as
number of copies, paper size and print orientation.
Also allows you to set functions related to sorting.
p. 5-31
Device Options
Setting
Allows you to set option equipment installed on
the machine.
p. 5-19
Job Management
Sets the copy track function.
Allows you to lock a printing job.
Also allows you to print the distribution number.
p. 5-33
–
Allows you to save and read the contents of the
settings on a Setup, Paper, Job Management or
Device Options Setting property sheet.
p. 5-21
Printer Driver for Linux
✎
Note
Refer to “5.2 Printer setting with X window System” (p. 5-4) for the procedure for displaying “dialog box.”
Differences between each OS are indicated based on Redhat Linux
ver. 6.2.
Details of OS-dependent functions are not given.
5-18
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
Device Options Setting tab
This tab allows you to set the options installed on the machine. Be sure to
select the options correctly otherwise some functions may be unusable or
printing may not take place correctly. The settings must match the machine configuration.
(1)
(1)
Device Options
Set the options installed in the machine.
• Installable Options
Pi4700e
This is a list of installable options. Select the desired
options from this list.
Available settings:
Duplex Cabinet, Dup + 2way Tray, LCT, Dup + LCC,
Mailbin Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher, Single-staple
Finisher, Folding Finisher, Hard Disk Drive in Copier
• Add
Pressing this button adds the selected option.
• Remove
Pressing this button removes the selected option.
• Installed Options
This is a list of currently installed options. Select it when
you wish to remove an option.
• Mailbox Setting
<when Mailbin Finisher is installed>
You can add a name to each mailbin of Mailbin Finisher. For details, see page 5-20.
(2)
User Name
The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the machine’s touch panel. Setting range: 8 characters max.
(3)
About…
Click to display the manufacturer and version number of the printer driver.
5-19
Printer Driver for Linux
(3)
Chapter 5
(2)
Properties settings
5
✎
Note
If the Dup + 2way Tray, Dup + LCC, and Duplex Cabinet are not correctly selected, it may not be possible to select the Finisher correctly.
Mailbox Setting dialog box
<when Mailbin Finisher is installed>
Allows you to set the names of the mailbins in Mailbin Finisher.
(1)
(2)
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
(3)
5-20
(1)
MailBox
This is the bin name editing box.
Setting range: max. 32 characters
(2)
Apply
Press to finalize a changed name.
(3)
Bin list
Displays a list of names of currently set bins.
To change the name of a bin, select the name to be changed.
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
Functions that are common to various tabs
These functions are common to tabs from Setup tab to Job Management
tab.
(1)
(2)
Easy Set
Allows you to call and use the settings stored in each tab.
• Easy Set Name
Allows you to call the settings stored in each tab.
• Save (Delete)
Used to save/delete the settings of tabs. When you
touch the Save button to save the contents of a tab, the
Save Easy Set Name dialog box appears. For details,
see page 5-22.
When you touch Delete, the stored set contents are deleted.
Paper preview/Machine preview
Allows you to display/change over the paper preview and machine preview.
• Page Layout
The layout of the printed data on a single page is displayed as an image. This allows you to check the status
for two-sided printing, for example.
See page 12-12 for the Page Layout list.
• Printer Figure
When the paper take-up tray and the paper exit tray are
set, the paper take-up tray and paper exit tray are displayed in green.
See page 12-15 for the Printer Figure list.
✎
Tip
If the set contents were changed, the Save button will appear.
If the set contents are the Easy Name contents, the Delete button will
appear.
Pi4700e
5-21
Printer Driver for Linux
(1)
Chapter 5
(2)
Properties settings
5
Functions of the Save Easy Set Name dialog box
Use to save print setting data.
Before pressing the Save button, set the contents of each tab.
(1)
(1)
Easy Set Name
Add a name to the stored contents.
Number of registrations: 32 max.
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
Number of characters: 10 characters max.
5-22
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
Setup tab
This tab allows you to set the paper take-up tray, paper exit tray and various high grade printing functions.
(1)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Paper Source
Selects the machine tray to be used.
Sets the cover page function and the OHP interleaving function.
• Paper Source
Select the machine tray to be used.
The selectable paper sizes are limited by the types of
paper take-up trays installed in the machine.
Available settings: Auto, Manual Feed, Tray1 to 4,
LCC, LCT
• Detail of Paper Source
Set the cover page function and OHP interleaving function. For details, see page 5-26.
Output Setting
This function selects the tray in the machine to which the paper is to be exited.
Settings can also be made for finishing functions including stapling, hole punching,
and folding.
• Paper exit destination
Select the machine tray to which you wish to exit the
prints.
The selectable paper exit trays are limited by the type
of finisher installed in the machine.
Mailbin Finisher: Auto, Mailbin
Excepting Mailbin Finisher: Auto
• Mailbin paper exit destination
If Mailbin is selected as the paper exit destination, set
the mailbin to which you wish to exit the paper.
• Detail of Output Setting
Set stapling, punching or folding. For details, see
page 5-28.
Duplex <when Dup + 2way Tray, Dup + LCC or Duplex Cabinet is installed>
Specifies two-sided printing.
• Off
Pi4700e
Not set
5-23
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
(2)
Properties settings
5
(4)
• Short Edge Binding
Two-sided printing takes place in such a way that the
short edge is bound.
• Long Edge Binding
Two-sided printing takes place in such a way that the
long edge is bound.
Smoothing
Correct the edges of the printed image.
Available settings: On, Off
✎
Note for (1)
Some paper sizes cannot be selected. For details, refer to the User
Manual of the machine.
✎
Tip for (1)
Set the paper take-up tray using Device Options Setting.
Chapter 5
✎
Printer Driver for Linux
The paper take-up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
✎
Note for (2)
Some paper sizes cannot be selected. For details, refer to the User
Manual of the machine.
Tip for (2)
Set the type of finisher using Device Options Setting.
The paper take-up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
✎
Note for (3)
If you print a document that contains pages of different sizes and/or
different directions in the same job, the image may be partially cut or
images may overlap each other.
Two-sided printing and OHP interleaving cannot be set simultaneously.
5-24
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
✎
Tip for (3)
The sizes for which you can perform two-sided printing are from 140 ×
182mm to 297 × 432 mm.
Short Edge Binding and Long Edge Binding are displayed on the Page
Layout.
✎
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
Note for (4)
This function is used with a document whose contents are mainly text.
Using the function with a photo image could even dirty the produced
image.
Pi4700e
5-25
Properties settings
5
Functions of the Detail of Paper Source Dialog Box
This function sets the cover page function and the OHP interleaving function.
(1)
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
(1)
(2)
(2)
Cover Page
This function is used to print a document with front and back cover pages. You can
print on the front cover, or leave it blank.
• Front Cover Page
Activates the front cover function.
• with Image
(Front Cover Page)
Prints on the front cover.
• Back Cover Page
Adds a back cover.
• with Image
(Back Cover Page)
Prints on the back cover.
• Cover Paper Source
Select the tray for the front cover and back cover papers.
Available settings: Tray1 to Tray4, LCC, LCT, Manual
Feed.
Interleaving Paper
This function inserts sheets (interleaving sheets) between sheets of OHP film when
printing on OHP film. You can either leave these sheets blank or print the same image
as that printed on the OHP film.
• OHP Interleaving
Activates the OHP interleaving function.
• with Image
Prints an image on the interleaving sheet.
• Interleaving Paper
Source
Select the tray for the interleaving paper.
Available settings: Tray1 to Tray4, LCC, LCT
✎
Note for (1)
When using special paper such as thick paper, the paper sometimes
fails to be exited to the selected paper exit destination.
You can set Tray1 to Tray4, LCC, LCT and Manual Feed using “Paper
Source”.
5-26
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
✎
Tip for (1)
The tray containing the paper on which the body of the document is to
be printed is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
✎
Note for (2)
When using the OHP interleaving function, set the number of sets of
prints to “1”.
You cannot select the same paper take-up port for both Paper Source
and Interleaving Paper Source.
You can set only Manual Feed using Paper Source.
OHP interleaving and two-sided printing cannot be set simultaneously.
Chapter 5
✎
Printer Driver for Linux
Tip for (2)
The OHP film tray is displayed in green on the Printer Figure.
Pi4700e
5-27
Properties settings
5
Functions of the Detail of Output Setting Dialog Box
Settings can also be made for finishing functions including stapling, hole
punching, and folding.
(3)
(1)
(2)
Chapter 5
(1)
Staple <when Mailbin Finisher, Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
This function allows you to staple one set of printed documents at a time.
Printer Driver for Linux
• Off
(2)
(3)
5-28
Printed documents are not stapled.
• Corner
Printed documents are stapled at their corners.
• Long Edge
<when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
The documents are stapled along the long edge.
• Short edge
<when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
The documents are stapled along the short edge.
• Center
<when Folding Finisher is installed>
The documents are stapled at the center.
Punch <when Mailbin Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed>
This function allows you to punch holes in the printed document.
• Off
The document is not punched.
• Short Edge
The document is punched along the short edge.
• Long Edge
The document is punched along the long edge
• Punch Holes
<Inch area only>
Set the number of holes to be punched.
Folding <when Folding Finisher is installed>
Select the desired paper folding function.
• Off
Printed pages are not folded.
• Just Output Size [ZFold]
Printed pages are folded into three parts.
• Half Folding
Printed pages are folded in two at their center.
• Crease
A crease is made in printed pages.
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
✎
Note for (1)
If “Staple” is set, printed pages are fed out into the Elevator Tray.
The stapling position is either the top left corner or the top right corner
depending upon the direction of the paper and the printing direction.
If the capacity of Mailbin Finisher, Single-staple Finisher, Multi-staple
Finisher or Folding Finisher is exceeded, the stapling operation may
be canceled. Refer to the User Manual of the machine.
If you print a document consisting of pages of different sizes in the
same printing job, stapling may be canceled.
✎
Tip for (1)
You can check the stapling position by using the icon in the dialog box
or Page Layout.
✎
Note for (1)
Number of punch holes can be specified only when Multi-staple Finisher is installed.
You cannot punch certain sizes of paper. Also, you may be unable to
punch the paper at certain positions. For details, refer to the User Manual of the machine.
If you select Long Edge in the manual bypass take-up mode, the paper
may sometimes fail to be punched.
Punch and OHP interleaving cannot be set simultaneously.
Punch Holes is not displayed for Metric area.
Pi4700e
5-29
Printer Driver for Linux
You cannot set certain sizes and kinds of paper. For details, refer to
the User Manual of the machine.
Chapter 5
Be careful when printing a document consisting of pages facing different directions because the stapling position will be determined by the
direction of the first page.
Properties settings
5
✎
Tip for (2)
You can check the punching positions by using the icon in the dialog
box or Page Layout.
✎
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
Note for (3)
If Folding is combined with Hole-Punch or Staple, the Hole-Punch or
Staple function to be used is restricted depending on the specific type
of the Folding function combined. For details, see Appendix A
(p. 12-7).
5-30
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
Paper tab
The Paper tab allows you to make basic printer settings.
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Original Document Size
Sets the Original Document Size.
• Paper size
(2)
Select the Original Document Size.
Available settings:
Letter, Legal, Executive, A3, A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS
B5, JIS B6, Invoice, Ledger, 11 × 14, FLS1, FLS2,
FLS3, FLS4
Copies
Specify the number of sets of prints to be made. Enter the value either directly or by
pressing ▲ or ▼.
Setting range: 1 to 999 sets
(3)
(4)
(5)
Pi4700e
Collate
Use this function when making multiple sets of prints of the same document, to specify whether or not to print one set at a time.
• Uncollated
All of the pages are simply printed one after the other.
For example, if you make five sets of prints, each page
is printed in sequence five copies at a time.
• Collated
Prints are output one set at a time. For example, if you
make five sets of prints of a 10-page document, the
prints will be output one set at a time.
Sorting
Select the sorting method.
• Unsorted
Prints are not sorted.
• Sorted
Prints are sorted.
Orientation
Select the orientation of the image. You can check the selected direction using Page
Layout.
• Portrait
Printing takes place lengthwise.
• Landscape
Printing takes place crosswise.
5-31
Printer Driver for Linux
(1)
Chapter 5
(4)
Properties settings
5
✎
Note for (1)
If you select a size of paper not loaded in the machine or Manual Feed,
the machine will give a message prompting you to add paper to Tray1,
Tray2, or Manual Feed and enter into a standby state.
✎
Note for (2)
When using the OHP interleaving function, set the number of sets of
prints to 1.
✎
Note for (3)
Keep Collate (Sort) on the application side set to OFF at all times.
Chapter 5
✎
Tip for (4)
If you exit prints to the Elevator Tray when the Single-staple Finisher,
Multi-staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher is installed, the prints are exited in a sawtooth manner.
Printer Driver for Linux
When the Folding Finisher is installed or if none of the finishing options
is installed, the prints are exited in a criss-cross manner.
The following are the minimum requirements for permitting criss-cross
sorting using the Collated setting.
Stacks of paper of the same size are loaded in the lengthwise
and crosswise directions.
The Staple, Punch or Cover mode is not set.
✎
Tip for (5)
A Portrait or Landscape print appears on the Page Layout.
5-32
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
Job Management tab
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
Pi4700e
Account Code
Check this box when using the copy track function. An account code is attached to
each printing job, enabling you to carry out management at the machine. In order to
use this function, copy track function must be set at the machine.
When the copy track function is set at the machine, printing may sometimes fail to
take place until the access number managed at the machine is correctly set.
• Account Code
Makes the copy track function valid.
• Access Number
Enter the access number set in the machine.
Setting range: 0002 to 9999 (4 digits)
Lock Job
Check this box when locking a printing job.
When using Lock Job, set a password in “Password.”
A locked printing job is printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on the
panel of the machine. In this case, a password is necessary.
• Lock Job
Make the lock job function valid.
• Password
Enter the password of the lock job.
Setting range: 0000 to 9999 (4 digits)
Distribution <when Hard Disk Drive in Copier is installed>
Specifies to add a distribution in the background during printing, and also sets the
conditions for adding distribution number.
A distribution number is added for each set of prints.
• Distribution Number
Select the distribution number function.
• 1st Page Only
Select whether to print the distribution number on only
the first page, or on all pages.
• Starting Number
Specify the starting number of the distribution numbers
to be printed.
Setting range: 001 to 999
5-33
Printer Driver for Linux
(1)
Chapter 5
(3)
Properties settings
5
✎
Note
When using this function in combination with the cover page function,
if you set printing of the cover page to No using the cover page function, and set serial number printing to Yes, a distribution number will
be printed on the cover page.
The orientation of the screen sometimes fails to match the orientation
of the distribution number.
✎
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
Tip
When the distribution number reaches 999, the next number returns to
000.
5-34
Pi4700e
Properties settings
5
Conflicts dialog box
The Conflicts dialog box, like the one shown below, appears when a setting that conflicts with another made previously is made on a tab.
✎
Tip
The dialog box looks slightly differently from this one when Device Options are being set or the PS driver is being used.
✎
Note
Some settings, which are defied by the machine for the restricted combinations of different functions, can at times be accepted by the printer
driver. If a print command is issued from the personal computer with
such settings made, the machine does not produce the output correctly or abandons the job to produce nothing. Make sure that you make
correct settings.
Pi4700e
5-35
Printer Driver for Linux
When the Conflicts dialog box appears, it shows the settings that could not
be combined with each other. Check the details, and click the Cancel button to quit.
Chapter 5
When the following dialog box appears, it shows that the currently selected settings conflict with each other.
Printer Driver for Linux
Chapter 5
5
5-36
Properties settings
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
6
6
Printer Driver for Macintosh
6.1
Installing the printer driver
Operating environment
Apple Macintosh System7.5.3 or later, 8.x, 9.x or
Mac OS X 10.2 or later
Personal computer
Apple Macintosh computer or a Macintosh-compatible
computer
I/O interface
Ethernet port
Memory
16MB or more
Disk drive
CD-ROM drive is required for installation only.
Free space on hard disk
2MB or more
Recommended printer software
LaserWriter 8.5.1. or later, LaserWriter 8.6 or later
✎
Note
Do not use an Ethernet cable of low quality: Defective printing could
result.
Installation (Macintosh OS 7/8/9)
This section explains the installation procedure for the Macintosh printer
driver under Macintosh OS 7, 8 or 9.
✎
Note
For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver on a Mac
operating system, refer to “Installation (Mac OS X)” on page 6-9.
Pi4700e
6-1
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Operating system
Chapter 6
Before installing the printer driver, make sure that your computer meets
the following requirements. If it doesn’t, the printer driver may not function
properly.
Installing the printer driver
6
The following procedures are concerned with Apple Macintosh
system7.5.5 and LaserWriter8.5.1.
✎
Note
When OS with other version or LaserWriter is used, procedures may
vary slightly.
Make sure that the controller and computer are properly connected to
each other with an Ethernet cable.
1 Turn ON the machine.
2 Turn ON the computer and start the Macintosh OS.
3 Install the printer controller CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer.
4 Double-click the Macintosh HD icon on the desktop.
5 Double-click the System Folder.
6 Double-click Extensions folder.
Chapter 6
7 Double-click Printer Description folder.
8 Drag the Minolta Di****-PS.ppd file in the PPD folder of the CD-ROM
to the Printer Description folder opened in step 7 to copy the file.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
✎
Note
Specify proper file according to the machine used.
Minolta Di****-PS.ppd
Specification (U: Inch area, E: Metric area)
Model name of the machine
6-2
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
6
9 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
✎
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Note
The steps that follow will apply when the LaserWriter printer driver has
previously been installed in the Macintosh computer.
Chapter 6
10 Select Chooser from the Apple menu.
Pi4700e
6-3
Installing the printer driver
6
11 The Chooser dialog box will appear.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
Click the LaserWriter icon.
6-4
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
6
12 The printer name set up with the NIC appears in the list under Select
a PostScript Printer. Select the printer and click the Create button.
13 The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box will ap-
✎
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Note
The following procedure is explained for Di470, specified for inch area,
as an example: Use by specifying proper file according to the machine
used.
Chapter 6
pear.
Select Minolta Di470U-PS.ppd from the dialog box and click the Select button.
Pi4700e
6-5
Installing the printer driver
6
14 After the installation procedures have been completed, a small printer
icon will appear to the left of the printer name.
15 Click the Setup... button.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
16 Click the Configure button.
6-6
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
6
17 Set the operating environment of the controller and click the OK button.
✎
Tip
For details of the screen components, see “Print options” on
page 6-14.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
18 Click the OK button.
Pi4700e
6-7
Installing the printer driver
6
19 The Chooser dialog box will reappear. Close the Chooser dialog box.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
20 A printer icon will appear on the desktop.
6-8
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
6
Installation (Mac OS X)
This section explains the installation procedure for the Macintosh printer
driver for Mac OS X.
✎
Note
This printer driver is compatible with Mac OS X version 10.2 or later.
1 Turn on the machine.
2 Turn on the computer and start up the Mac OS.
❍
When starting up Mac OS, log in with administrator privileges.
3 Install the printer controller CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer.
4 Copy Minolta Di470U-PS.ppd, Minolta Di470E-PS.ppd and MinoltaPPDPlugin.dmg to the desktop from the PPD folder on the CDROM.
5 Double-click MinoltaPPDPlugin.dmg, which was copied to the desktop.
Chapter 6
6 Double-click MinoltaPPDPlugin.pkg to start it.
The Pi4700 PPD Plugin installer starts up.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
7 Click the Continue button.
Pi4700e
6-9
Installing the printer driver
6
8 Select the partition where the software will be installed, and then click
the Continue button.
As an example, the dialog box below shows the installation on the
OSX disk.
Chapter 6
9 Click the Install button.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
The plugin for Di470PPD is installed.
6-10
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
6
10 Click the Close button.
This completes the installation of the PPD plugin. Next, install the
printer driver.
11 Double-click the MacOSX icon on the desktop.
12 Click the Application icon.
13 Double-click the Utility folder.
14 Double-click the PrintCenter icon.
Chapter 6
15 Click the Add... button.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
16 Select Other... beside Printer Model:.
Pi4700e
6-11
Installing the printer driver
6
17 Select either Minolta Di470U-PS.ppd (for measurements in inches) or
Minolta Di470E-PS.ppd (for metric measurements), which were copied to the desktop in step 4, and then click the Choose button.
18 Select the appropriate printer model, and then click the Add button.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
The printer driver is installed.
6-12
Pi4700e
Installing the printer driver
6
19 From the Printers menu, click Show Info.
The Printer Info property dialog box appears.
20 Select Installable Options.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
21 Enter the printer settings, and then click the Apply Changes button.
✎
Note
For details on the screen components, see “Print options” on
page 6-14.
22 Close the Print Center dialog box.
Pi4700e
6-13
Print options
6
6.2
Print options
This section describes the print settings available in the application’s Print
dialog box (displayed by clicking Print in the File menu).
Print options (Macintosh OS 7/8/9)
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
Each print option allows you to make specific settings as detailed below.
For a detailed description of each function, see the corresponding reference page.
Reference
Page
Print Option
Available Settings
Installable Options
Allows you to make settings for options installed
on the machine.
p. 6-15
Page Attributes
Allows you to make the basic settings for printing.
p. 6-16
PostScript Options
Allows you to make visual-effect and font-related
settings.
p. 6-17
General
Allows you to set the pages and the number of
copies for printing.
p. 6-18
Background Printing
Allows you to make settings for background printing.
p. 6-19
Cover Page
Allows you to print out a page of descriptive data
about each print job.
p. 6-20
Color Matching
Allows you to set color data output.
p. 6-21
Layout
Allows you to set the printing layout.
p. 6-22
Error Handling
Allows you to set the handling of error information.
p. 6-23
Save as File
Allows you to make settings for saving data in
files.
p. 6-24
Printer Specific Options
Allows you to make not only such basic settings,
such as paper source and exit port, but also enhanced functions, including duplex printing, OHP
interleaving, and Cover mode.
It further allows you to set finishing capabilities,
including sort, staple, punch, and folding, for
those occasions when you need to make multiple
complete sets of the original document.
p. 6-25
✎
Note
The dialog box samples given throughout the subsequent pages are
taken from LaserWriter version 8.5.1. The dialog boxes may vary in
appearance, showing different functions depending on the particular
version of the LaserWriter you are using. See the documentation provided for LaserWriter.
6-14
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Installable Options
The Installable Options dialog box allows you to set the options installed
on the machine. Make sure that the correct settings are made; otherwise,
some printer functions may not function properly or printing cannot be performed correctly. The settings should match the machine configuration.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Installed Trays
Set the tray configuration of the machine.
Setting values
(3)
Dup+2way Tray, Dup+LCC, Duplex Cabinet
LCT
Set whether the Large Capacity Cassette is installed or not.
Not Installed, Installed
Finisher
Set the specifications of the finishing option installed on the machine.
Setting values
Not Installed, Mailbin Finisher, Folding Finisher, Multistaple Finisher, Single-staple Finisher
✎
Note
If Installed Trays has not been properly set, it may be impossible to
select Finisher properly.
Pi4700e
6-15
Chapter 6
Setting values
(2)
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(1)
Print options
6
Page Attributes
The Page Attributes property sheet allows you to make the basic settings
for printing.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Format for
Specify the name that represents Pi4700e set up with the NIC.
(2)
Paper
Select the size of the paper to be used for printing.
Chapter 6
Setting values
(3)
Orientation
Select the orientation of the image with the corresponding icon.
Setting values
(4)
Portrait, Landscape
Scale
Specify the image size of the print.
Setting range
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Ledger, 11×14, Legal, Letter, Executive, Invoice, A3,
A4, A5, A6, JIS B4, JIS B5, JIS B6, FLS1, FLS2, FLS3,
FLS4
25 to 400%
✎
Note
If you select a size of paper not loaded in the machine or Manual Feed,
the machine will give a message prompting you to add paper to Tray1,
Tray2, or the manual bypass port and enter into a standby state.
6-16
Pi4700e
Print options
6
PostScript Options
The PostScript Options property sheet allows you to make visual-effect
and font-related settings.
(1)
(2)
Visual Effects
Allows you to turn over the image or apply other visual effects.
(2)
Prints the image as if the original were viewed in a mirror.
• Flip Vertical
Prints the image upside down from the original.
• Invert Image
Reverses tonal arrangements of the original, producing
a negative image.
Image & Text
Allows you to set the output quality of text and graphics and make font-related settings.
• Substitute Fonts
Sets font substitution if a printer font is similar to or under the same name as the screen font. It is enabled at
installation.
• Smooth Text
Smooths bitmapped fonts. It is enabled at installation.
• Smooth Graphics
Smooths the graphic image. It is enabled at installation.
• Precision Bitmap Alignment
Adjusts bitmapped images to the printer resolution.
• Unlimited Downloadable Fonts
Enables downloading of as many fonts as required.
✎
Tip
The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used. See the documentation provided for LaserWriter.
Pi4700e
6-17
Chapter 6
• Flip Horizontal
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(1)
Print options
6
General
The General property sheet allows you to set the pages and the number
of copies for printing.
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(1)
Copies
Set the number of copies to be made.
Setting range
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
(2)
1 to 999 sets
Pages
Specify the pages to be printed.
All
Prints all pages.
From: to:
Prints pages between the specified pages.
(3)
Paper Source
This cannot be set on this property sheet. Use Printer Specific Options.
(4)
Destination
Select whether to print to the machine or a file.
Setting values
(5)
Printer, File
Collated
Do not make a setting on this property sheet. Use Printer Specific Options.
✎
Note
It is possible to enter a number exceeding setting range: However, do
not specify the number exceeding the range.
When using the OHP interleaving function, set the number of sets of
prints to “1”.
6-18
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Background Printing
The Background Printing property sheet allows you to make settings for
background printing.
(1)
(2)
• Foreground (no spool
file)
Does not allow the user to use the application while the
document is printing.
• Background
Allows the user to use the computer even while a document is printing.
Print Time
Set the conditions for background printing.
• Urgent
Prints a job ahead of any others.
• Normal
Sets for printing at the end of the print queue.
• Print at
Sets the date and time-of-day for printing.
• Put Document on Hold
Places a job in the print queue without printing.
✎
Tip
The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used. See the documentation provided for LaserWriter.
Pi4700e
6-19
Chapter 6
(2)
Print in
Specify whether to enable background printing or not.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(1)
Print options
6
Cover Page
The Cover Page property sheet allows you to print out a page of descriptive data about each print job. This function differs from Front Cover Page
in Printer Specific Options.
(1)
(2)
Chapter 6
(1)
(2)
Print Cover Page
Select whether to add the Cover Page or not, or how the Cover Page is to be added.
None
Does not add a Cover Page.
Before Document
Adds the Cover Page at the beginning of the document.
After Document
Adds the Cover Page at the end of the document.
Cover Page Paper Source
Unavailable. The same paper source as that selected for “Paper Source” in “Printer
Specific Options” is used.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
✎
Tip
The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used. See the documentation provided for LaserWriter.
6-20
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Color Matching
The Color Matching property sheet allows you to make settings for color
data output.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
• Color/Grayscale
Prints with gray scale.
• Grayscale
This function is not supported.
• Black and White
Prints in monochrome.
• ColorSync Color Matching
Prints with color reproduction data.
• PostScript Color Matching
Prints with printer color characteristics.
Intent
Sets matching style.
Setting Values
(3)
Chapter 6
Print Color
Select gray scale or monochrome.
Auto selection, Perceptual matching, Relative colorimetric, Saturation, Absolute colorimetric
Printer Profile
Selects profile.
✎
Tip
The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used. See the documentation provided for LaserWriter.
Pi4700e
6-21
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(1)
Print options
6
Layout
The Layout property sheet allows you to set the printing layout.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
Pages per sheet
Specify the number of pages assigned to a single sheet of paper.
Chapter 6
Setting values
1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 16, 4 (Down Before Across), 6 (Down Before Across), 9 (Down Before Across), 16 (Down Before Across)
(2)
Layout Direction
Specify the layout direction by clicking the appropriate icon.
(3)
Border
Specify the type of border line.
Setting values
None, Single hair line, Single thin line, Double hair line,
Double thin line
Printer Driver for Macintosh
✎
Tip
The layout direction can be checked on the paper illustration on the
left.
The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used.
6-22
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Error Handling
The Error Handling property sheet allows you to make settings for handling error information.
(1)
• No special reporting
Does not display Error information.
• Summarize on screen
Displays Error information on the screen.
• Print detailed report
Prints Error information.
✎
Tip
The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used. See the documentation provided for LaserWriter.
Pi4700e
6-23
Chapter 6
If there is a PostScript error
Set the method for handling error information.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(1)
Print options
6
Save as File
The Save as File dialog box allows you to choose settings for file format
when you save data as a file, but without printing.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Format
Specify the file format.
Chapter 6
Setting Values
(2)
PostScript Level
Specify the version of PostScript.
Setting values
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(3)
(4)
PostScript Job, EPS Mac Standard preview, EPS Mac
Enhanced preview, EPS No Preview, Acrobat PDF
Level 1 Compatible, Level 2 and 3
Data Format
Specify the data format.
• ASCII
Saves as a text file.
• Binary
Saves as a binary file.
Font inclusion
Set the font to be saved in the file.
Setting Values
None, All, All But Standard 13, All But Fonts in PPD file
✎
Tip
The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used. See the documentation provided for LaserWriter.
6-24
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Printer Specific Options
The Printer Specific Options property sheet allows you to make not only
such basic settings as the paper source and exit port, but also enhanced
functions including duplex printing, OHP interleaving, and Front Cover. It
also allows you to specify Sort, Staple, Punch, Folding, and other finishing
functions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
Pi4700e
Paper Source
Select the paper source to be used by the machine.
Available options depend on the type of paper source available on the machine.
• Auto
Automatically selects the paper source in which paper
of the size specified by Paper Size is loaded.
• Tray1 to Tray4, LCC,
LCT
Prints on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
• Manual Feed
Prints on paper loaded in the Multi Manual Feed Tray.
Output Setting
Select the machine exit tray into which the prints are to be fed.
Available options are limited by the type of finishing option configured with the machine.
• Mailbin Finisher
Auto, bin1 to bin5
• Except Mailbin Finisher
Auto
6-25
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Note
With LaserWriter 8.5.1, used for this explanation, all items in Printer
Specific Options can be displayed as one page by scrolling. With some
other LaserWriter versions, contents in Printer Specific Options are divided into two pages as Printer Specific Options 1 and Printer Specific
Options 2. Contents of function for each item are the same, however.
Chapter 6
✎
Print options
6
(3)
(4)
(5)
Chapter 6
(6)
(7)
Orientation
Select the orientation of the image on the paper.
• Portrait
Prints the document across the narrower dimension of
the paper.
• Landscape
Prints the document across the wider dimension of the
paper.
• Rotated Landscape
Outputs landscape orientation upside down.
Duplex Print <only when the Dup + 2way Tray, Dup + LCC or Duplex Cabinet is
mounted>
Select the desired duplex print function. The results of the specified duplex print can
be viewed on the paper preview.
• Off
Does not perform duplex printing.
• Short Edge Binding
Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed
pages can be bound along the short edge.
• Long Edge Binding
Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed
pages can be bound along the long edge.
Collate
Select whether printed pages are to be sorted into copy sets when printing more than
one copy of the same document.
Collated
Pages into copy sets. For instance, when printing 5
sets of a document consisting of 10 pages, printed pages are sorted by copy (i.e., 5 sets of a 10-page document are output).
Uncollated
Prints the specified number of pages one page at a
time. For instance, when printing 5 sets of a document,
pages are printed five times, one page at a time.
Sorting
Select the sorting method:
• Unsorted
Prints are not sorted.
• Sorted
Prints are sorted.
Smoothing
Correct the edges of the printed image.
Setting values
Off, On
✎
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Note for (1)
It is possible that an option cannot be selected because of the paper
size. For details, see the User Manual of the machine.
✎
Tip for (1)
The paper source is set with Installable Options.
The paper source options to be selected are limited depending on the
function or functions to be used (e.g., OHP Interleaving, Front Cover,
etc.).
6-26
Pi4700e
Print options
6
✎
Note for (2)
It is possible that an option cannot be selected because of the paper
size. For details, see the User Manual of the machine.
✎
Tip for (2)
The finishing option is set with Installable Options.
✎
Note for (3)
Staple and Punch positions will not be correct if this function is selected improperly.
✎
Tip for (3)
Rotated Landscape is handy for positioning Punch or Staple on the opposite side.
✎
Note for (5)
Always set Collated in General screen to OFF.
✎
Note for (6)
When sorting is used, set Collate item to Uncollated.
✎
Tip for (6)
If Elevator Tray is selected when the machine is equipped with a
Multi-staple Finisher, Single-staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher, sets or
stacks will be stacked in a sawtooth manner so that each is easy to
identify.
If Folding Finisher is mounted, or if none of the finishing options is
mounted, sets or stacks will be stacked in a crisscross manner.
Pi4700e
6-27
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Tip for (4)
The paper sizes that enable Duplex Print are Ledger, 11 × 14, Legal,
Letter, Executive, Invoice, A3, A4, A5, JIS B4, JIS B5, FLS1, FLS2,
FLS3, and FLS4.
Chapter 6
✎
Print options
6
Following are the minimum requirements for enabling crisscross sorting:
Stacks of paper of the same size, loaded in both lengthwise
and crosswise direction.
Staple, Punch or Front Cover Page is not set.
Chapter 6
(8)
Staple <only when Multi-staple Finisher, Single-staple Finisher, Mailbin Finisher or
Folding finisher is mounted >
Select whether to staple each copy set of the document.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
• Off
(9)
(10)
6-28
Does not staple the printed pages.
• Corner
Staples together each copy set at its corner.
• Short Edge
<only when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is
mounted> Stapled along the short edge of the document.
• Long Edge
<only when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is
mounted> Stapled along the long edge of the document.
• Center
<only when Folding Finisher is mounted> Stapled at
the center of the document.
Punch <only when Multi-staple Finisher, Mailbin Finisher or Folding Finisher is
mounted>
Select whether to punch holes in the printed pages.
• Off
Does not punch holes.
• Short Edge
Punches holes along the short edge of the document.
• Long Edge
Punches holes along the long edge of the document.
Folding <only when Folding Finisher is mounted>
Set the folding functions for finishing.
• Off
Does not fold the printed page.
• Crease
Makes a crease in the printed page.
• Crease + Staple
Staples the printed page at the center with a crease
made in it.
• Half Folding
Folds the printed page in two.
Pi4700e
Print options
6
• Half Folding + Staple
Folds printed pages in two, staples them together, and
punches holes in them.
• Z-folding
Folds printed pages into three parts.
• Z-folding + Corner Staple
Folds printed pages into three parts and staples them
at the corner.
• Z-folding + Long Edge
Staple
Folds printed pages into three parts and staples them
together.
• Z-folding + Punch
Folds printed pages into three parts and punches holes
in them.
• Z-folding + Corner Staple, Punch
Folds printed pages into three parts, staples them at
the corner, and punches holes in them.
• Z-folding + Long Edge
Staple, Punch
Folds printed pages into three parts, staples them together, and punches holes in them.
OHP Interleaving
Select whether to insert a sheet of paper between sheets of OHP transparencies on
which prints have been made.
• Off
Does not perform OHP Interleaving.
• Tray1 to Tray4, LCC,
LCT
Specify the paper source for the interleaves.
Front Cover Page
Lets you use paper for the cover of a different type (such as colored paper) from that
for the text pages of your copy sets.
• Off
Feeds paper for all pages of your copy sets from the
paper source specified in Paper Source.
• Manual Feed, Tray1 to
Tray4, LCC, LCT
Specify the paper source for the cover.
✎
Note for (8)
If the Folding function is to be used, turn Off Staple and make the Staple setting under Folding.
If Staple is set, printed pages are fed out into the Elevator Tray.
The stapling position may be at the upper left or upper right corner depending on the orientation of the paper and printing.
If the number of sheets of paper exceeds the limit that the Multi-staple
Finisher, Single-staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher can handle, the
stapling function may be canceled. For details, see the machine User
Manual.
If the original document for a print job contains a page of a different
size from the others and this document is printed, the Staple setting
may be canceled.
If the original document for a print job contains a page with a different
orientation from the others, care should be used because the stapling
position is determined according to the direction of the first page.
It is possible that an option cannot be selected because of the paper
size. For details, see the User Manual of the machine.
Pi4700e
6-29
Chapter 6
(12)
Folds printed pages in two and punches holes in them.
• Half Folding + Staple,
Punch
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(11)
Folds printed pages in two and staples them together.
• Half Folding + Punch
Print options
6
✎
Note for (9)
If the Folding function is to be used, turn Off Punch and make the
Punch setting under Folding.
It is possible that an option cannot be selected because of the paper
size. Some paper sizes do not allow you to select the hole position. For
details, see the User Manual of the machine.
Holes may not be punched if Long Edge is selected with manual feed
copying.
The Multi-staple Finisher for the inch areas offers three punch holes.
✎
Note for (10)
If Staple or Punch is to be used with Folding, be sure to turn Off Staple
or Punch.
✎
Note for (11)
Set 1 in Copies when using OHP Interleaving.
Chapter 6
Use Paper Source to specify OHP transparencies. The paper source
that can be selected is Manual Feed.
The same paper source cannot be selected for OHP Interleaving and
Paper Source.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
✎
Tip for (11)
The interleaves are blank pages.
✎
Note for (12)
This function differs from LaserWriter standard Cover Page function
(p. 6-20).
Use Paper Source to specify OHP transparencies: The paper source
can be selected from Manual Feed, Tray1 to Tray4, LCC and LCT.
If thick paper or other special paper is selected, the machine may not
feed prints out into the selected exit tray.
6-30
Pi4700e
Print options
6
✎
Tip for (12)
The covers have data printed on them.
No back covers are available.
(13)
(14)
(15)
Pi4700e
(13)
Access Number
If the copy track function is to be used, enter a four-digit access number. An access
number is attached to each printing job, enabling you to carry out management at the
machine. In order to use this function, copy track function must be set at the machine.
When the copy track function is set at the machine, printing may sometimes fail to
take place until the access number designated at the machine is correctly set.
Enter the access number set in the machine.
Setting range: 0 to 9 for each box
(14)
Password
If Lock Job is to be used, enter a four-digit lock job password. Entering 0 for all four
digits indicates that there is no password.
A locked printing job will be printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on
the panel of the machine. In this case, a password is necessary.
Enter the password of the lock job.
Setting range: 0 to 9 for each box
6-31
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
(14)
Print options
6
(15)
User Name
The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the machine’s touch panel.
Setting range: 4 numbers max
✎
Note
If nothing is entered, the setting is turned off.
Conflicts dialog box
A message as shown below will appear when functions that are incompatible with each other are specified.
It appears when you have made a wrong selection.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
The message gives the detail of the functions that are incompatible with
each other. Check the detail and click Continue or Cancel to exit the message.
6-32
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Print options (Mac OS X)
Each print option allows you to make specific settings as detailed below.
For a detailed description of each function, see the corresponding reference page.
Copies & Pages
Allows you to set the pages and the number of
copies for printing.
—
Layout
Allows you to set the printing layout.
—
Error Handling
Allows you to set the handling of error information.
—
Paper & Quality Settings
Allows your to make the basic settings for printing.
p. 6-34
Paper Source Settings
Allows you to set the paper source.
p. 6-35
Job Management
Allows you to print out a page of descriptive data
about each print job.
p. 6-36
Finishing Settings
Allows you to set finishing capabilities, including
sort, staple, punch, and folding, for those occasions when you need to make multiple complete
sets of the original document.
p. 6-37
Summary
Displays a list of the current print settings.
p. 6-39
✎
Note
The Copies & Pages, Layout, Output Options and Error Handling settings are supported by Print Center. Refer to the document corresponding to the operating system being used.
No conflict warnings will appear, indicating that incompatible functions
are specified.
Pi4700e
6-33
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Available Settings
Chapter 6
Reference
Page
Print Option
Print options
6
Paper & Quality Settings
The Paper & Quality Settings property sheet allows your to make the basic settings for printing.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Chapter 6
(4)
(1)
Orientation
Select the orientation of the image.
Setting values
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(2)
(3)
(4)
Collated
Pages into copy sets. For instance, when printing 5
sets of a document consisting of 10 pages, printed pages are sorted by copy (i.e., 5 sets of a 10-page document are output).
Uncollated
Prints the specified number of pages one page at a
time. For instance, when printing 5 sets of a document,
pages are printed five times, one page at a time.
Sorting
Select the sorting method:
• Unsorted
Prints are not sorted.
• Sorted
Prints are sorted.
Smoothing
Correct the edges of the printed image.
Setting values
6-34
Portrait, Landscape
Collate
Select whether printed pages are to be sorted into copy sets when printing more than
one copy of the same document.
Off, On
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Paper Source Settings
The Paper Source Settings property sheet set the paper source.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(4)
Pi4700e
• Auto
Automatically selects the paper source in which paper
of the size specified by Paper Size is loaded.
• Tray1 to Tray4, LCC,
LCT
Prints on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
• Manual Feed
Prints on paper loaded in the Multi Manual Feed Tray.
Duplex Print <only when the Dup + 2way Tray, Dup + LCC or Duplex Cabinet is
mounted>
Select the desired duplex print function. The results of the specified duplex print can
be viewed on the paper preview.
• Off
Does not perform duplex printing.
• Short Edge Binding
Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed
pages can be bound along the short edge.
• Long Edge Binding
Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed
pages can be bound along the long edge.
OHP Interleaving
Select whether to insert a sheet of paper between sheets of OHP transparencies on
which prints have been made.
• Off
Does not perform OHP Interleaving.
• Tray1 to Tray4, LCC,
LCT
Specify the paper source for the interleaves.
Front Cover Page
Lets you use paper for the cover of a different type (such as colored paper) from that
for the text pages of your copy sets.
• Off
Feeds paper for all pages of your copy sets from the
paper source specified in Paper Source.
• Manual Feed, Tray1 to
Tray4, LCC, LCT
Specify the paper source for the cover.
6-35
Chapter 6
(2)
Paper Source
Select the paper source to be used by the machine.
Available options depend on the type of paper source available on the machine.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(1)
Print options
6
Job Management
The Job Management property sheet allows you to print out a page of descriptive data about each print job.
(1)
(2)
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
(3)
(1)
Access Number
If the copy track function is to be used, enter a four-digit access number. An access
number is attached to each printing job, enabling you to carry out management at the
machine. In order to use this function, copy track function must be set at the machine.
When the copy track function is set at the machine, printing may sometimes fail to
take place until the access number designated at the machine is correctly set.
Enter the access number set in the machine.
Setting range: 0 to 9 for each box
(2)
Lock Job Password
If Lock Job is to be used, enter a four-digit lock job password. Entering 0 for all four
digits indicates that there is no password.
A locked printing job will be printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on
the panel of the machine. In this case, a password is necessary.
Enter the password of the lock job.
Setting range: 0 to 9 for each box
(3)
User Name
The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the machine’s touch panel.
Setting range: 4 numbers max
✎
Note
If nothing is entered, the setting is turned off.
6-36
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Finishing Settings
The Finishing Settings property sheet allows you to set finishing capabilities, including sort, staple, punch, and folding, for those occasions
when you need to make multiple complete sets of the original document.
(1)
(2)
(3)
OutputBins <only when Mailbin Finisher is mounted>
Select the machine exit tray into which the prints are to be fed.
Available options are limited by the type of finishing option configured with the machine.
Setting range: Auto, Bin1 to Bin5
(2)
Staple <only when Multi-staple Finisher, Single-staple Finisher, Mailbin Finisher or
Folding finisher is mounted>
Select whether to staple each copy set of the document.
• Off
(3)
(4)
Pi4700e
Does not staple the printed pages.
• Corner
Staples together each copy set at its corner.
• Short Edge
<only when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is
mounted> Stapled along the short edge of the document.
• Long Edge
<only when Multi-staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is
mounted> Stapled along the long edge of the document.
• Center
<only when Folding Finisher is mounted> Stapled at
the center of the document.
Punch <only when Multi-staple Finisher, Mailbin Finisher or Folding Finisher is
mounted>
Select whether to punch holes in the printed pages.
• Off
Does not punch holes.
• Short Edge
Punches holes along the short edge of the document.
• Long Edge
Punches holes along the long edge of the document.
Folding <only when Folding Finisher is mounted>
Set the folding functions for finishing.
• Off
Does not fold the printed page.
• Crease
Makes a crease in the printed page.
6-37
Printer Driver for Macintosh
(1)
Chapter 6
(4)
Print options
6
• Crease + Staple
Staples the printed page at the center with a crease
made in it.
• Half Folding
Folds the printed page in two.
• Half Folding + Staple
Folds printed pages in two and staples them together.
• Half Folding + Punch
Folds printed pages in two and punches holes in them.
• Half Folding + Staple,
Punch
Folds printed pages in two, staples them together, and
punches holes in them.
Folds printed pages into three parts.
• Z-folding + Corner Staple
Folds printed pages into three parts and staples them
at the corner.
• Z-folding + Long Edge
Staple
Folds printed pages into three parts and staples them
together.
• Z-folding + Punch
Folds printed pages into three parts and punches holes
in them.
• Z-folding + Corner Staple, Punch
Folds printed pages into three parts, staples them at
the corner, and punches holes in them.
• Z-folding + Long Edge
Staple, Punch
Folds printed pages into three parts, staples them together, and punches holes in them.
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
• Z-folding
6-38
Pi4700e
Print options
6
Summary
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
Displays a list of the current print settings.
Pi4700e
6-39
Printer Driver for Macintosh
Chapter 6
6
6-40
Print options
Pi4700e
Introduction
Convenient Functions
7.1
Introduction
In this chapter, you will learn how to print your document, guiding you
through steps from start to end of printing.
WordPad, a Windows 98 standard application, is used as an example to
show the steps to follow for using Windows 98 PCL6 version driver.
Though the screen format differs from one driver to another, the given procedure may be used as reference for a driver other than the Windows 98
PCL6.
If a different procedure is applicable to a specific driver, that is included
with the text.
✎
Tips
Different procedures apply to start a property sheet depending on the
application. This chapter is concerned only with the procedure to be
used with WordPad.
A single application may offer two or more different procedures to follow to open a property sheet. If, for example, WordPad is used on Windows 98 PCL6 driver, the text that follows will instruct you to open a
property sheet by opening the Print dialog box with Print in the File
menu. Another procedure that may be used is: Open the Page Setup
dialog box with Page Setup in the File menu, and then click the Printer button to open the Page Setup dialog box before opening a property
sheet.
To open the dialog box with Windows 2000, select Print... from File menu,
and select Minolta Di470 PCL6 from Printer selection in General.
Pi4700e
7-1
Convenient Functions
7
Chapter 7
7
Printing on both sides of the paper
7.2
Printing on both sides of the paper
Overview
This section explains how to print a multi-page document which has been
created with an application using both sides of a sheet. It also shows the
steps to be followed when stapling the two-sided pages.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
To use this function, a Dup + 2way Tray, Dup + LCC or Duplex Cabinet
must be mounted on the machine.
Print data
Printout
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each property sheet of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that the size of the document created with the application
is displayed in Original Document Size on the Paper tab.
5 Click the Setup tab.
7-2
Pi4700e
Printing on both sides of the paper
Booklet.
If Long Edge Binding is selected, printing will be performed on both sides
of each page so that the printed pages form a book when they are bound
along the long edge. If Short Edge Binding is selected, printing will be
performed on both sides of each page so that the printed pages form a
book when they are bound along the short edge.
Long Edge Binding
Short Edge Binding
✎
Tip
The Duplex/Booklet icon shows which edge is to be bound.
7 If you want to staple the printed pages, click Detail Of Output Setting
to open the dialog box and select Corner Staple in Staple. Then, click
the OK button.
✎
Note
When Long Edge Binding is selected, Short Edge cannot be selected
for punch hole.
When Short Edge Binding is selected, Long Edge cannot be selected
for punch hole.
✎
Tip
To make holes in the printed pages, select Long Edge or Short Edge
in Punch on Detail of Output Setting.
8 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
9 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
10 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
Pi4700e
7-3
Convenient Functions
6 Select Long Edge Binding or Short Edge Binding from Duplex/
Chapter 7
7
Printing more than one copy at a time
7.3
Printing more than one copy at a time
Overview
This section explains how to print two or more copies of a document that
has been created with an application. Most applications allow this function
to be executed from the Print dialog box. This section explains how to print
two or more set copies of documents created with an application. Most applications allow this function to be executed from the Print dialog box. The
steps described in the following are use to print two or more collated sets
of copies by using the Collate function on the printer driver.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Print data
Printout
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
7-4
Pi4700e
7
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
If the Paper tab is not displayed, click the Paper tab.
4 Make sure that the size of the document created with the application
Chapter 7
Printing more than one copy at a time
5 In Copies, set the number of copies to be printed.
6 In Collate, select Collated so that the printed pages will be sorted into
copy sets.
✎
Tip
When Uncollated is selected, printed pages will be sorted into groups
of identical pages.
7 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
8 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
9 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
Pi4700e
7-5
Convenient Functions
is displayed in Original Document Size.
Specifying N-up printing
7.4
Specifying N-up printing
Overview
This section explains how to print two pages on one side of a sheet of paper (2 up). The same procedure is applicable when you want to perform 4
up, 6 up, 9 up or 16 up printing.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Print data
2up printout
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that the size of the document created with the application
is displayed in Original Document Size on the Paper tab.
5 Click the Setup tab.
6 Select 2 up in N-up.
7 Click N-up style to open the dialog box and set the Page Location.
7-6
Pi4700e
7
Chapter 7
Specifying N-up printing
8 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
9 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
start.
✎
Note
Void image and image overlap may result in printing of a document
that contains pages of assorted sizes and directions.
Pi4700e
7-7
Convenient Functions
10 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
Printing in reduced/enlarged size
7.5
Printing in reduced/enlarged size
Overview
This section explains how to enlarge or reduce the image on a document
created with an application for printing on paper of a designated output
size.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Printout
Print data
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
If the Paper tab is not displayed, click the Paper tab.
4 Make sure that the size of the document created with the application
is displayed in Original Document Size.
5 Specify Output Paper Size in Output Paper Size item and select the
print page size.
6 Select Fit to Paper and specify the zoom ratio matching the output paper.
7-8
Pi4700e
✎
Tip
When Fit to Paper is not specified, zoom ratio in scaling will be effective.
7 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
8 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
9 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
✎
Note
If a paper size that does not match the paper loaded in the machine is
selected, the machine will display a message that prompts you to load
paper in the manual feed port, entering standby state.
Fit to Paper cannot be selected if Custom Paper is selected in Output Paper Size. To enlarge or reduce the image, directly input the
zoom ratio in Scaling.
Pi4700e
7-9
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
Printing in reduced/enlarged size
Printing pages with watermarks
7.6
Printing pages with watermarks
Overview
This section explains how to print pages with text (e.g. Confidential, Draft)
in the background.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Watermark print
Procedure
Depending on environment used, Watermark may not be edited. If registration is necessary, perform registration first, referring to Appendix A
(p. 12-1).
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
7-10
Pi4700e
Printing pages with watermarks
correctly set on the Paper tab.
5 Click the Setup tab and select DO NOT COPY in Watermark.
6 Select the page on which to print the watermark.
7 If you want to change the position or style of an existing watermark,
click the Edit button: Watermark dialog box, from which you can edit
text, will appear.
Specify Text and text style, Angle, and Position.
✎
Tip
If you cannot find an appropriate watermark, click New button: You
can create new watermark.
For the position, specify the distance from the center.
8 After the settings have been made, click the OK button to close the dialog box.
9 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
10 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
11 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
✎
Note
This function may not be effective in some applications.
Pi4700e
7-11
Convenient Functions
4 Make sure that all setting items, such as Original Document Size, are
Chapter 7
7
Specifying booklet printing
7.7
Specifying booklet printing
Overview
This section explains how to layout and print four pages of a document on
both sides of a single sheet of paper so that the printout may be folded at
its center to form a booklet.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
To use this function, a Dup + 2way Tray, Dup + LCC or Duplex Cabinet
must be mounted on the machine.
Print data
Printout
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that the size of the document created with the application
is displayed in Original Document Size on the Paper tab.
5 Select Collated for Collate.
6 Click the Setup tab.
7-12
Pi4700e
7
Chapter 7
Specifying booklet printing
7 Select Booklet Left Binding in Duplex/Booklet.
8 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
10 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
✎
Note
If the original document for a printing job contains a page of a different
size or different direction from the others, and this document is printed,
a void image or overlapped image could result.
Pi4700e
7-13
Convenient Functions
9 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
Printing pages with a distribution number
7.8
Printing pages with a distribution number
Overview
This section explains how to print a distribution number in the background
for each copy set.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
To use this function, a Hard Disk Drive in Copier must be mounted on the
machine.
Print data
Printout
✎
Note
The orientation of the distribution number may not match that of the
print image.
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
7-14
Pi4700e
4 Make sure that all setting items, such as Original Document Size, are
correctly set on the Paper tab.
5 Select Collated for Collate.
6 Click the Job Management tab and check the Distribution Number.
7 Select the page on which to print the distribution number, either 1st
Page only or All Pages.
8 Specify the starting distribution number for Starting Number.
9 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
10 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
11 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
Pi4700e
7-15
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
Printing pages with a distribution number
Using the copy track function
7.9
Using the copy track function
Overview
It is possible to keep track of the number of prints produced by each account.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Setting of the machine specifies 100-account management or 1000-account management.
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that the size of the document created with the application
is displayed in Original Document Size on the Paper tab.
5 Click the Job Management tab.
6 Apply check mark to Account Code.
7 Input Access Number.
8 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
9 The print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
10 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
7-16
Pi4700e
✎
Note
When Account Code is used, printing may not take place unless the
account number has been correctly set.
To clear the Account Code function, type any number in the Access
Number box. If no number is typed in the Access Number box, the
message “Access Number Error” will appear and you might not be
able to exit from the function.
Pi4700e
7-17
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
Using the copy track function
Printing on OHP transparencies
7.10
Printing on OHP transparencies
Overview
This section explains how to insert a sheet of paper (interleaf) between
sheets of OHP transparencies when printing on sheets of OHP transparencies. This interleaf may be left blank or have the same data printed on
it as the OHP transparencies.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Print data
Printout
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that all setting items, such as Original Document Size, are
correctly set on the Paper tab.
7-18
Pi4700e
5 Click the Setup tab and select the paper source for OHP transparencies in Paper Source.
✎
Note
Paper source for OHP film is Manual Feed only.
6 Click the Detail of Paper Source: Detail of Paper Source dialog box
will appear.
7 Apply check mark to OHP Interleaving.
8 Select the with Image box if you want the OHP data printed on the interleaves.
9 Select the paper source for interleaves in Interleaving Paper Source.
✎
Note
The same paper source as that used for OHP transparencies cannot
be specified as paper source for interleaves.
10 Click the OK button.
11 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
12 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
13 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
Pi4700e
7-19
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
Printing on OHP transparencies
Adding a cover to each copy set
7.11
Adding a cover to each copy set
Overview
This section explains how to add a front cover and/or a back cover to each
of your copy sets. Four different modes are available to choose from. Select the appropriate one according to your needs.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Print data
Printout
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that all setting items, such as Original Document Size, are
correctly set on the Paper tab.
5 Click the Setup tab and select the paper source for text in Paper
Source.
7-20
Pi4700e
✎
Note
Paper sources for text are Manual Feed, Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, LCC and LCT.
6 Click the Detail of Paper Source: Detail of Paper Source dialog box
will appear.
7 Apply check mark to Front Cover Page.
8 Select the with Image box if you want data printed on the front cover.
9 Select whether to add a back cover and, if the back cover is to be added, select whether to print data on the back cover using Back Cover
Page and with Image.
10 Select the paper source for the front/back cover under Cover Paper
Source.
✎
Note
Paper sources for cover page are Manual Feed, Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, LCC
and LCT.
11 Click the OK button.
12 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
13 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
14 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
Pi4700e
7-21
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
Adding a cover to each copy set
Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function
7.12
Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function
Overview
Lock Job allows you to keep a particular document confidential so that
document can be printed only after a password is entered on the machine.
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Procedure on the printer driver side
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that all setting items, such as Original Document Size, are
correctly set on the Paper tab.
5 Click the Job Management tab.
6 Apply check mark to Lock Job.
7-22
Pi4700e
Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function
7 Input password.
✎
Note
To clear the Lock Job function, type any number in the Password box.
If no number is typed in the Password box, the message “Password
Error” will appear and you might not be able to exit from the function.
✎
Tip
Password is 4-digit number, from 0002 to 9999. If you enter a 3-digit
number for password, it will be regarded as 4-digit number, automatically adding “0” to the head.
8 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
9 The Print dialog box will appear. Click the OK button.
10 The data will be transferred to the machine, but printing will not yet
start.
Procedure on the machine side (Unlocking a job)
After the data has been transferred to the machine, operate the machine
to start printing.
1 Press the [Job List] key on the control panel.
Pi4700e
7-23
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
2 Touch the [Unlock] key.
3 Input password.
✎
Note
All jobs, whose preprogrammed passwords match the password entered, are “unlocked.”
4 The job is “unlocked” and printing will start.
7-24
Pi4700e
7
Procedure on the machine side (Deleting a job)
After the data has been transferred to the machine, it can be deleted without being printed.
Convenient Functions
1 Press the [Job List] key on the control panel.
2 Touch the [Delete] key.
3 Select job to be deleted.
Pi4700e
Chapter 7
Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function
7-25
Chapter 7
7
Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function
Convenient Functions
4 Enter a 4-digit password from the 10-key Pad.
5 This deletes the job from the job list.
7-26
Pi4700e
Chapter 7
7.13
7
Using the folding function
Overview
A multi-page document prepared in an application can be finished into a
book form through Half Folding and Staple.
To use this function, a Folding Finisher must be mounted on the machine.
The function is enabled only when the PS driver is used.
Procedure
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PS is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PS Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make sure that Original Document Size is correctly set on the Paper
tab.
5 Check the Output Paper Size box and select 11 × 17.
6 Select 2 up in N-up.
Pi4700e
7-27
Convenient Functions
Using the folding function
Using the folding function
Chapter 7
7
7 Click N-up Style to open its dialog box. Then, set Page Location to
Horiz. Ascending and click the OK button.
8 Click “Detail Of Output Setting” to open the dialog box.
Convenient Functions
9 Specify Half Folding under Folding.
10 Specify Long Edge under Staple.
11 Click the OK button.
12 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button.
13 The Print dialog box will reappear. Click the OK button.
14 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
7-28
Pi4700e
Using the settings function
Chapter 7
Using the settings function
Overview
Frequently used groupings of print settings can be stored and called up as
necessary for application in actual print jobs.
Procedure
Operations with “Easy Set” are storing, calling up and deleting.
Depending on environment used, number of registrations will be different:
Refer to Appendix A (p. 12-9) for details.
Using the settings stored for a current print job
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 dialog box will appear.
4 Click the down-arrow ▼ of Easy Set Name and from subsequent
menu, select the Title name to be used.
Pi4700e
7-29
Convenient Functions
7.14
7
Using the settings function
Chapter 7
7
5 Dialog box for confirmation will appear. Click the OK button. The setting data will then be read to the driver software.
6 Click the OK button.
Convenient Functions
7 The Print dialog box will appear. Click the OK button.
8 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon
start.
Storing settings
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each tab of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Make settings in Setup, Paper, Quality, Job Management and PostScript properties as necessary.
5 Click the Save button.
✎
Tip
If setting is changed as in step 4, the Easy Set Name becomes Untitled and the Save button will appear.
7-30
Pi4700e
7
6 The Save Easy Set Name dialog box will appear. Input the Easy Set
Convenient Functions
Name to be registered and click the OK button.
✎
Tip
If the same Easy Set Name already exists, a dialog box asking whether it should be over-written or not will appear.
7 Click the OK button.
8 The Print dialog box will then reappear. To start printing immediately,
click the OK button: The data will be transferred to the machine and
printing will soon start. If printing is not to be done now, click the Cancel button.
✎
Note
Settings can be stored from the printer properties dialog box opened
from the Printers window.
With PS, it is not possible to save the settings if the function has been
activated from the application. Start the function using the printer icon.
The same procedure also applies when the printer properties dialog
box is used. However, be sure to click the Cancel button to close the
properties dialog box: If it is closed by clicking the OK button, the settings will become the default values when the properties dialog box is
accessed from the application.
Pi4700e
Chapter 7
Using the settings function
7-31
Using the settings function
Chapter 7
7
Deleting settings which have been stored
1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the
Convenient Functions
document: Normally, printing can be started by selecting Print from
the File menu.
2 The Print dialog box will appear.
Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer,
and click the Properties button.
✎
Note
Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate (Sort) in the
Print dialog box. To ensure proper printing operation, however, turn
OFF these items of the application, and make the necessary settings
in each property sheet of the printer driver.
3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear.
4 Click the down arrow ▼ of Easy Set Name and, from subsequent
menu, select the name to be used.
5 Dialog box for confirmation will appear. Click the OK button: The setting data will then be read to the driver software.
6 Click the Delete button.
7 Dialog box for confirmation will appear. Click the OK button: The title
name will disappear and the setting data will be deleted.
7-32
Pi4700e
✎
Note
If the setting contents are changed before deleting, the Easy Set
Name will change to Untitled and the Delete button will change to the
Save button. Deleting cannot be performed in this status.
8 Click the OK button.
9 The print dialog box will then reappear. Click the Cancel button.
✎
Note
Settings can also be deleted from the printer icon property sheet
opened from the Printers window.
With PS, it is not possible to save the settings if the function has been
activated from the application: Start the function using the printer icon.
The detailed print settings remain valid even after the Easy Set Name
has been cleared from the options list.
Pi4700e
7-33
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
Using the settings function
Confirming that the data has been transferred to the machine
Chapter 7
7
7.15
Confirming that the data has been transferred to
the machine
Convenient Functions
Overview
Status of data transferred from the personal computer will be displayed in
Job List.
Procedure
1 Press the [Job List] key on the control panel.
2 Job list will be displayed.
7-34
Pi4700e
✎
Note
For printing a lock job, refer to “Procedure on the machine side (Unlocking a job)” (p. 7-23) in “7.12 Using the lock job (print PC confidential) function”.
For unlocking the job, refer to “Procedure on the machine side (Deleting a job)” (p. 7-25) in “7.12 Using the lock job (print PC confidential)
function”.
Pi4700e
7-35
Chapter 7
7
Convenient Functions
Confirming that the data has been transferred to the machine
Confirming that the data has been transferred to the machine
Convenient Functions
Chapter 7
7
7-36
Pi4700e
Outline
8
Network Interface Card
8.1
Outline
Chapter 8
8
G
“Getting ready”
G
“Setting up the network card”
Network Interface Card
The following shows the general outline of this chapter.
Read the section that covers your particular network environment.
G
“Windows configuration”
G
“NetWare configuration”
G
“Macintosh configuration”
Refer to these sections as required.
G
“Using the utility software”
Read the following sections when necessary.
8.2
G
“Troubleshooting”
G
“Jumper switch setting”
G
“Specifications”
Getting ready
This Network Card is a multi-protocol network card that provides Ethernet
connection for the Minolta Pi4700e printer controller and offers the following features.
G
Automatic Ethernet type detection (10BaseT, 100BaseT)
G
Fully transparent AppleTalk printing support for the Macintosh, including support for binary PostScript printing.
G
Peer-to-peer printing program allows printing on a network without going through a server
❍
Peer-to-Peer Printing with TCP/IP (Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0)
Peer-to-Peer Printing with IPX/SPX (Windows 95/98/Me)
❍
Pi4700e
G
Novell NetWare PSERVER support under bindery base or Novell Directory Services (NDS)
G
lpr/lpd functions under TCP/IP
G
SNMP control using MIB-II and private MIB
SNMP support using standard MIB on a compatible printer or printerspecific MIB
8-1
Getting ready
Chapter 8
8
G
Onboard HTTP server allowing configuration of network function settings using a Web browser
G
Direct printing from an IPP client
G
SLP (Service Location Protocol) support
Utility software (on the CD-ROM)
Network Interface Card
The following items are contained in the nicutlty folder on the CD-ROM
that comes with the printer controller.
G
Discovery Program
❍
IPX/IP Management Access Program (MAP)
G
Peer-to-Peer Printing Programs
See “3 Network Settings” for details.
❍
❍
IP Peer-to-Peer Printing Program
IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program
G
BOOTP Program
❍
BootPL32.exe
G
NetWare Setup Utility Program
❍
NWSetup
G
Macintosh Utility Program
❍
NIManage (AppleTalk Utility)
G
UNIX TCP/IP Utility Programs
G
MIB Setting File
The ReadMe file on the CD-ROM contains the latest information about
each of the network software applications. Be sure to read the ReadMe
file before using the network software.
8-2
Pi4700e
Getting ready
8
System requirements
Novell NetWare Version 4.x or 5.x
Macintosh System 7.x, 8.x, 9.x, Mac OS X
Version of Protocol or
NOS
Windows, or LAN Server systems supporting lpr over TCP/IP
Chapter 8
The following table describes the system requirements for using the Network Card hardware and software.
Novell NetWare printing requires NetWare Capture, NPRINT
and PCONSOLE (later than 1.0) utilities.
NWSetup requires Windows 95/98/Me/2000 or Windows NT
4.0, and the Novell 32-bit client.
The IP Peer-to-Peer utility requires Windows NT 4.0; Windows
95/98/Me.
The IPX Peer-to-Peer utility requires Windows 95/98/Me.
Software
The MAP utility requires Windows NT 4.0; Windows 95/98/Me/
2000. MAP also requires a browser such as Microsoft Internet
Explorer or Netscape.
TCP/IP setup and maintenance may be done with Telnet. Monitoring and maintenance with HTTP requires a suitable Internet
Web browser program supporting HTML.
AppleTalk printing requires printer PPD appropriate to the Digital Copier. AppleTalk NIManage Utility Program is provided for
setup and maintenance (except Mac OS X).
Hardware
Support for 10 or 100 megabit Ethernet networks: 10/
100BaseT (twisted pair cables) and hardware
CD-ROM drive
Pi4700e
8-3
Network Interface Card
Red Hat Linux 6.1 or later, SuSE Linux 6.3 or later, OpenLinux
2.3 or later, Turbolinux 4.0 or later.
Setting up the network card
8
8.3
Setting up the network card
Chapter 8
Connecting a network cable
1 Make sure that Digital Copier power is turned off.
2 Connect the network cable to the Network Card.
Network Interface Card
Network cable
10/100BaseT port
❍
Insert the plug into the 10-100BaseT port on the rear panel of the
network card and press it in until you hear it click securely into
place.
3 Power up the Digital Copier and check for abnormalities.
✎
Important!
Use only Category 5 shielded 10/100BaseT cable.
Configuring the network card
You must first configure the Network Card and your computer before you
can print using the Network Card. The settings you need to make depend
on the configuration of your network environment. sections 4 through 6 of
this chapter describe configurations for the environments listed below.
Follow the configurations procedure for the operating system you are using.
8-4
G
Section 4 - Windows configuration
Network printing in a Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP/NT environment
G
Section 5 - NetWare configuration
Network printing in a NetWare environment
G
Section 6 - Macintosh configuration
Network printing in a Macintosh environment
Pi4700e
Windows configuration
8.4
8
Windows configuration
NetWare configuration
This section provides details on how to configure a Novell NetWare server
in order to print from a NetWare client. Follow the procedures listed below
to configure the NetWare server from a NetWare client.
Using NWSetup
NWSetup is a utility program that comes bundled with the Network Card,
which simplifies configuration of the NetWare file server and Network
Card. See “NWSetup (Windows)” (p. 8-38).
Using NetWare Client
G
NetWare 4.x configuration in bindery services emulation
This section describes how to configure the Network Card with NetWare 4.x bindery services emulation. See “NetWare 4.x Configuration
Using Bindery Emulation” (p. 8-5).
G
Novell Directory Services configuration
This section describes how to configure the Network Card with NetWare 4.x directory services. See “Configuration Using Novell Directory
Services” (p. 8-8).
NetWare 4.x Configuration Using Bindery Emulation
Novel NetWare 4.x supports two operation modes: NDS and bindery services emulation. This chapter explains how to configure NetWare 4.x using bindery emulation. For information about NDS, see “Configuration
Using Novell Directory Services” (p. 8-8).
These two services run simultaneously and transparently to each other.
The Network Card can be configured to operate in the bindery services
mode only or under NDS. Under NDS, the Network Card will also service
older file servers operating in bindery mode.
✎
Note
The Network Card will not be able to find its file servers if it is not correctly configured for NDS operation and the bindery services mode is
not running. You can use MAP or a Web browser to check the configuration of the Network Card. See “Management Access Program
(Windows)” (p. 8-28) for more information.
Pi4700e
8-5
Network Interface Card
8.5
Chapter 8
Refer to “3 Network Settings” (p. 3-1) for details on how to perform network printing in a Windows environment.
NetWare configuration
8
Confirming the Bindery Context
Chapter 8
Before installing the Network Card under Novell NetWare 4.x in the bindery emulation mode, you should first confirm whether the server has a
bindery context (name assigned to the server by the bindery services
mode). If it doesn’t, install in the NDS mode.
Bindery context is required to install the Network Card in the bindery emulation mode. Use the following procedure to confirm whether your server
has bindery context.
Network Interface Card
1 On the NetWare 4.x server, type:
load install
Enter
2 Select Maintenance/Selective Install from the menu.
3 On the Installation Options menu, select NCF File Options.
4 From the menu of available NCF file options, select Edit AUTOEXEC.NCF.
5 Search the file and check to see if it contains a statement similar to the
one shown below.
SET BINDERY CONTEXT=OU=ENG
OU=ENG is an example file server context. Use your own file server
context in place of OU=ENG.
6 At the console prompt, type the SET BINDER CONTEXT statement
exactly as you entered it in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file.
✎
Note
The command you type at the console prompt takes effect immediately. The contents defined in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file take effect when
the server is shut down and then restarted.
8-6
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
Configuring in the Bindery Mode
1 Log into the server where you want to install the print server as supervisor or as a user with equivalent privileges.
2 Type PCONSOLE and press
Enter
to display the Available Options
Chapter 8
After you confirm that your server has a bindery context, use the following
procedure to configure the Network Card.
3 Press
F4
to enter the bindery mode.
✎
Note
If a message appears telling you to log in with bindery connection, it
means that the attached server does not have bindery mode enabled.
Either perform the procedure under “Confirming the Bindery Context”
or log onto a server with bindery services enabled.
4 On the Available Options screen, select Quick Setup and then press
Enter
.
Use Quick Setup to connect the print server, print queue, and printer
you want to use. You will be able to change this settings later if you
want.
5 Select Print Server and then press
F3
to modify the entry.
6 Type the name of the print server you want to use into the New print
server field, and then press
Pi4700e
Enter
.
8-7
Network Interface Card
screen.
NetWare configuration
8
✎
Chapter 8
Note
You can use MAP or a Web browser to change the print server name.
See “Management Access Program (Windows)” (p. 8-28) for more information.
The initial default print server name is: MLT_<serial number>.
7 Press
Network Interface Card
to move the cursor to New printer, type the printer name,
and then press Enter .
8 Press
to move the cursor to New print queue, type the print queue
name, and then press Enter .
9 Press
to move the cursor to Printer type and then press Enter .
From the printer type list, select Other/Unknown and then press Enter .
10 After all the settings are the way you want, press
F10 to save the configuration.
Repeat steps 5 through 10 for each file server that the print server services.
After you are finished, select Print Queues or Print Servers on the
Available Options screen when you want to view, delete, or edit print
server or queue settings.
Configuration Using Novell Directory Services
Novell Directory Services (NDS) provides a more advanced approach to
network management than previous versions of NetWare. It stores and
tracks all network objects. A Version 4.x or 5.x server must have NDS installed in order to function.
This means every NetWare 4.x or 5.x server is a directory server, because
it services printers, print servers, print queues, and other named directory
objects. With appropriate privileges, you can create a print server object
and assign them network-wide contexts (or locations), which eliminates
the need to perform troublesome setup of print servers on each individual
network server.
NDS provides true enterprise networking based not on individually defined
physical sites, but rather on a shared network database. The result is vastly improved print server setup and management.
The Directory Information Base (DIB) is used to store information about
servers and services, users, printers, gateways, etc. It is a distributed database that allows access to data anywhere on the network, regardless of
where it is stored. Pre-4.x NetWare versions provide the same data as
DIB, but the data is stored in the NetWare bindery.
8-8
Pi4700e
DIB is designed for more flexible access, more specific security, and, because it is distributed, a design that allows partitioning. Unlike bindery’s
flat file structure, the DIB directory uses an object-oriented structure, enabling network-oriented access as opposed to bindery’s server-oriented
access.
The bindery emulation mode provides the directory with downward compatibility with NetWare bindery. This section explains operation of the print
server with a 4.x NetWare system in bindery emulation mode. Once bindery emulation is enabled, NDS receives bindery requests and responds
just as if a bindery existed on the NetWare server being accessed.
It should be noted here that information obtained from a bindery query
may not be stored on the server because the directory is a partitioned and
distributed database. Though a NetWare 4.x server is not operating from
a bindery, applications making bindery requests do not know the difference.
NWADMIN can be used to configure the printer in NDS. Before printing,
you must use the procedures below to configure NDS, and to set up the
Network Card with NDS context and tree.
The procedures for using NWADMIN to create the printer, print server,
and other print queue objects are provided below. After you create these
objects you must then associate them with each other. Under NetWare 4.x
you can keep bindery resources on any server if you want by declaring a
SET statement in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file.
If you want, you can also use PCONSOLE instead of NWADMIN. PCONSOLE can also be used to set up static print server information, such as
which queues to service and whom to notify in case of problems. See the
Novell NetWare documentation for details about using PCONSOLE for
NDS.
✎
Note
Some NetWare servers require that bindery context be configured on
the file server, even when using the NDS mode.
Pi4700e
8-9
Chapter 8
8
Network Interface Card
NetWare configuration
NetWare configuration
8
Creating a Printer Object
1 Click the NWADMIN icon in the NetWare Tools group in Windows.
Chapter 8
This displays the NetWare Administrator dialog box. To access your
directory tree, open a browser window by clicking the Tools menu item
and then the Browse item.
2 Highlight the organizational unit or organization where you want to cre-
Network Interface Card
ate the print service in the directory tree, select Object, and then on
the pop up menu select Create.
✎
Note
If you want, you can also create objects in NWADMIN by selecting an
organizational unit, right-clicking to display a pop-up menu, and leftclicking Create to display the New Object window. Then you would
continue with the steps below.
3 When the New Object window shown below appears, select the
Printer icon on the Class of New Object list and then click the OK
button.
4 On the Create Printer window that appears, type the printer name you
want into the Printer Name field and then click the Create button.
8-10
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
Creating a Print Server Object
up menu that appears.
3 On the New Object window, select the Print Server Name icon on the
Class of New Object list, and then click the OK button.
4 On the Create Print Server window that appears, type the print server
name you want into the Print Server Name field and then click the
Create button.
Creating a Print Queue Object
1 Highlight Organizational Unit again.
2 Select Object from the main menu, and then select Create on the pop
up menu that appears.
3 On the New Object window that appears, select the Print Queue icon
on the Class of New Object list, and then click the OK button.
4 Click the Directory Services Queue button, type the names you want
into the Print Queue Name and Print Queue Volume fields, and then
click the Create button.
❍
❍
Pi4700e
If you do not know the print queue volume name (the name of the
hard disk you will be accessing), click the icon to the right of the
Print Queue Volume field to display the Select Object window
shown below. Objects lists volumes that you can choose.
If you cannot find the volume you want in the list, click Directory
Context items until you find the volume where you want the queue
to reside.
8-11
Network Interface Card
2 Select Object from the main menu, and then select Create on the pop
Chapter 8
1 Highlight Organizational Unit again.
NetWare configuration
8
5 Click the object (hard drive) you want and it appears in the Selected
Object field.
6 Click OK and the full volume appears in the Print Queue Volume
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
field. Finally, click the Create button.
Assigning a Printer Object
1 Navigate to the directory tree, and double-click a printer object you just
created. This displays the Printer window.
8-12
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
2 Click the Assignments button, and then click the Add button to dis-
3 From the Objects list, select a print queue you just created and then
click the OK button to add the print queue to the Print Queues box in
the Printer window.
4 Click the OK button again.
Pi4700e
8-13
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
play the Select Object window.
NetWare configuration
8
Assigning a Print Server Object
1 At the directory tree, double-click a print server object you just created.
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
This displays the Print Server window.
2 Click the Assignments button, and then click the Add button to display the Select Object window.
3 From the Objects list, select the printer object you just created and
then click the OK button to add the printer (with its context) to the
Prints box in the Print Server window.
4 Click the OK button again.
8-14
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
Checking Assignments
1 At the directory tree, double-click a print queue object you just created.
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
This displays the Print Queue window.
2 Click the Assignments button.
The print queue and printer will appear in the proper boxes of the
Printer Queue window if they are properly configured.
3 Check the contents of the window and then click the Cancel button.
Printer Configuration and Reset
After you finish making the NWADMIN settings described above, you
must configure and reset the Digital Copier (by powering it down and then
back up again) before you can start printing.
Pi4700e
8-15
NetWare configuration
8
Configuring NetWare Enterprise Print Services (NDPS)
Chapter 8
NetWare Enterprise Print Services is a Novell software solution built on
the Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS) architecture. NDPS is an advanced printing architecture that can be run on either an IPX or an IP network. NDPS over IP is the native printing approach for NetWare 5.x
systems.
Network Interface Card
NDPS is not yet implemented on printer resident print servers. Instead, a
NetWare server includes a gateway that translates between NDPS and a
printer-supported protocol or protocols. Gateways exist for PSERVER on
IPX, for LPD, and for raw binary sockets printing on IP. Some gateways
support NDPS configuration and status information capabilities using SNMP.
The following sections describe the NDPS configuration using Novell-supplied gateways. For networks running NDS over IPX, the gateways use
the NetWare PSERVER function implemented on the printer Network
Cards. For networks using IP, the Novell-supplied gateway uses the printer LPD capability. Novell is developing an NDPS gateway for printers implementing the IPP protocol; update information on how to set this up will
be provided when the capability is released and verified with these printers.
Creating NDPS Manager
An NDPS Manager provides a platform for Printer Agents that reside on
the server. An NDPS Manager must be created as an object in the NDS
tree before you can create server-based Printer Agents. This procedure is
necessary regardless of the gateway or underlying network protocol used.
To create an NDPS Manager object
1 In NetWare Administrator, select the container where you want the
NDPS Manager object to reside.
2 Choose Object — Create — NDPS Manager.
This causes the Create NDPS Manager Object dialog box to appear.
3 Type a name in the NDPS Manager Name field.
4 Browse for the Resident Server where you want this manager assigned.
This can be any server in the current NDS tree in which you have installed NDPS. This will be the only server on which you will be able to
load this NDPS Manager. The NDPS Manager will store its database
on a volume of this server.
8-16
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
Configuring Queue-Based Printers
Prerequisites:
✔
The print queue you want to reference must already exist.
✔
On a Novell 4.x or 5.x network using IPX, install the printer and the
print server.
1 In NetWare Administrator, select the container where you want the
NDPS Manager object to reside.
2 Choose Object — Create — NDPS Printer.
This causes the Create NDPS Printer dialog box to appear.
3 Type a name in the NDPS Printer Name field.
4 In the Printer Agent Source field, select Create a New Printer Agent
and click the Create button.
This causes the Create Printer Agent dialog box to appear.
5 Confirm the Printer Agent name (default is the name of the new printer
you are creating) and browse to select the NDPS Manager you want
to assign it to.
6 At the Gateway Types window, select the Novell Printer Gateway.
This causes the Novell PDS dialog box to appear.
7 Configure the Novell PDS by selecting the Printer Type and Port Handler Type and click the OK button.
This starts the Configure Novell Port Handler configuration wizard.
8 In the Connection Type field, click Forward Jobs to a Queue and
then click the Next button. (The Port Type options are grayed out
when you select the Queue connection type.)
This displays a screen with the Queue Name and Queue User Name
fields.
9 Provide the queue name and queue user name.
Pi4700e
8-17
Network Interface Card
The Novell NDPS gateway for IPX is compatible with queue-based NetWare printing technologies. The following procedure describes how to set
up and configure NDPS to interface with the printer via queue-based printing.
Chapter 8
Configuring an NDPS Gateway for IPX
NetWare configuration
8
Chapter 8
Browse for the target print queue. If no queues are listed, no queues
exist in the current context. Browse the tree to find a queue in a different context. The queue you select must exist in the current tree; otherwise, you will need to create a “bindery reference queue” in your own
container to allow access to the actual queue. See “Bindery Reference
Queues” on page 8-19.
✎
Network Interface Card
Note
The user you specify may need to log in to the server on which this
queue resides. This user must have full privileges to manage this
queue.
10 Click the Finish button.
This causes the Select Printer Drivers dialog box to appear.
11 Select the printer driver for each client operating system.
❍
❍
When users install this printer, these drivers will be automatically
downloaded to their workstations.
If the driver you need is not listed, rather than adding the driver to
the RMS, you can choose None from the top of each list. Users will
then be asked to provide a disk with the appropriate driver the first
time they install this printer on their workstations.
12 Click the Continue button.
The main browser window appears with your new controlled-access
printer listed.
8-18
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
A bindery reference queue serves as a pointer to a real NetWare queue
on both types of servers. After you have created a bindery reference
queue to point to a real bindery queue on a target server, you can then
configure a Printer Agent to send jobs to that queue just as you would if
the queue actually resided on a NetWare 4.x or NetWare 5.x server in the
same tree. The following section explains how to accomplish this procedure using NetWare Administrator.
✎
Note
If a bindery reference queue already exists, you can use it with NDPS
with no modification. A new reference queue object does not need to
be created in NDS.
Configuring Bindery Reference Queues
Prerequisites
Before you can create a bindery reference queue, the following requirements must be met:
✔
The print queue you want to reference must already exist on the server
you want to point to.
✔
A bindery object of the same name as the one you are using must exist
on that server and must have rights to the print queue you are referencing.
1 In NetWare Administrator, select the container where you want the reference queue to reside.
2 Choose Object — Create.
This causes the New Object dialog box to appear.
3 Select Print Queue.
This causes the Create Print Queue dialog box to appear.
Pi4700e
8-19
Network Interface Card
Novell suggests that you upgrade all of your printers to NDPS as soon as
possible. However, you may still want to provide your users with access
to queue-based printing resources for a variety of reasons. While connecting to queue-based printers controlled by NetWare 4 or NetWare 5 servers in the current NDS tree can be accomplished directly when you
configure a Printer Agent, you may need to create one or more “bindery
reference queues” to provide access to printers controlled by a NetWare
3 file server or printers controlled by a NetWare 4 or NetWare 5 server in
a different NDS tree.
Chapter 8
Bindery Reference Queues
NetWare configuration
8
4 Select Reference a bindery queue. (Notice that the dialog box
changes when you select this option.)
5 If you want to assign a bindery reference queue name different from
Chapter 8
the queue’s name on the legacy server, enter the reference name in
the Print Queue Name field.
If you do not want to assign a different reference name, leave the field
blank.
Network Interface Card
6 Browse for a bindery server and queue.
This causes the Network Server and Queue dialog box to appear.
7 Click List Only Attached Servers to specify whether you want this
option turned on or off.
❍
To see a list of all available servers, turn off this option. Select the
name of the server you want to attach to. Log in to this server at
the prompt.
8 Double-click the server you want to use.
A list of queues available on that server appears in the Queues list. If
you are not attached, you must authenticate to that server.
✎
Note
To complete this procedure, you must have rights to the print queue
you are referencing and a bindery object of the same name as the one
you are using must exist on that server. If no queue names appear, no
queues have been defined on that server.
9 Select the queue for which you want to create a reference and click the
OK button.
This causes the Create Print Queue dialog box to appear again.
10 Click the Create button.
The bindery reference queue now appears in your NDS tree.
11 Return to Step 10 of the procedure for configuring a queue-based
printer as a controlled-access printer (See “Configuring Queue-Based
Printers” on page 8-17.)
Now that this queue is created, you can configure a Printer Agent to service jobs from a queue or to submit jobs to a queue.
8-20
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
Configuring the Queue-Based Printer Option at the Server Console
1 Do the steps described in “Creating Public-Access Printers in Net-
This causes the Port Handler Configuration: Queue-Based Printing Mode screen to appear.
3 Select Distinguished Queue Name, press Enter, and type an existing queue name. This is the name of the print queue where you want
the Printer Agent to place jobs.
❍
If you press Enter or Insert again, you can browse the network
tree to search for a queue.
4 Highlight User Name, press Enter or Insert, and type the name of the
user who will manage the queue just specified.
❍
To browse the network tree for a valid user, press Enter or Insert.
5 Click Accept and Exit.
This causes Printer Agent with its associated Print Device Subsystem
(PDS) and Port Handler string to be loaded. The Port Handler configuration utility closes and control returns to the NDPS Manager.
Configuring an NDPS Gateway for IP
Configuring Remote Printers Running in lpr Mode
✎
Note
LPR mode works only if TCP/IP is configured correctly. See the documentation on configuring TCP/IP on a NetWare server.
1 From the browser’s Object menu for the organization or organizational unit, choose Create.
This causes the New Object dialog box to appear.
2 Choose Object — Create — NDPS Printer.
This causes the Create NDPS Printer dialog box to appear.
3 Type a name of your choice in the NDPS Printer Name field.
Pi4700e
8-21
Network Interface Card
2 Choose Connection Type — Queue-Based Printer.
Chapter 8
Ware Administrator”.
NetWare configuration
8
4 At the Printer Agent Source field, select Create a New Printer Agent
and click the Create button.
Chapter 8
This causes the Create Printer Agent dialog box to appear.
5 Confirm the Printer Agent name (default is the name of the new printer
you are creating) and browse to select the NDPS Manager you want
to assign it to.
6 In the Gateway Types window, select the Novell Printer Gateway.
Network Interface Card
The Novell PDS dialog box opens.
7 Configure the Novell PDS by selecting the Printer Type and Port Type.
Then click the OK button.
This starts the Configure Novell Port Handler configuration wizard.
8 Configure the Connection Type as Remote (LPR on IP) and click the
Next button.
9 Specify the IP address of your host and click the Finish button.
10 Select the printer driver for each client operating system.
❍
❍
❍
When users install this printer, these drivers will be automatically
downloaded to their workstations.
If you choose a Windows 3.x driver but not a Windows 95 or Windows NT driver, a 16-bit driver will be selected. Normally this does
not create problems.
If the driver you need is not listed, rather than adding the driver to
the RMS, you can choose None from the top of each list. Users will
then be asked to provide a disk with the appropriate driver the first
time they install this printer on their workstations.
11 Click the Continue button.
The main browser window appears with your new controlled-access
printer listed.
8-22
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
Using the Remote Printer LPR/TCPIP Option at the Server Console
A workstation or a remote file server
G
Directly to the network, running in lpr mode in a TCP/IP environment
and for which no gateway is available
A Printer Agent configured in this mode will emulate a legacy print server
(PServer Emulation), and will no longer require the pserver.nlm file.
1 Perform the steps described in “Creating Public-Access Printers in
NetWare Administrator”.
2 Choose Connection Type — Remote Printer LPR/TCPIP.
This causes the Port Handler Configuration: Remote Printer LPR/
TCPIP Mode screen to appear.
3 Choose IP Host, select Host Type, and provide the information requested.
4 Click Accept and Exit.
The Printer Agent with its associated Print Device Subsystem and Port
Handler string are then loaded. The Port Handler configuration utility
closes and control returns to the NDPS Manager.
Public-Access Printers and Controlled-Access Printers
Creating Public-Access Printers in NetWare Administrator
1 Double-click the NDPS Manager object you will be using to control this
Printer Agent.
2 In the Identification page for the NDPS Manager object you want to
use, choose the Printer Agent List and click New.
This causes the Create Printer Agent dialog box to appear.
3 Type the name of the Printer Agent in the Printer Agent Name field.
4 At the Gateway Types window, select the Novell Printer Gateway.
This causes the Novell PDS dialog box to appear.
5 Configure the Novell PDS by selecting the Printer Type and Port Handler Type and click the OK button.
Pi4700e
8-23
Network Interface Card
G
Chapter 8
At the server console, you can create a Printer Agent to represent a printer
attached to one of the following:
NetWare configuration
8
6 Select the printer driver for each client operating system.
❍
Chapter 8
❍
When users install this printer, these drivers will be automatically
downloaded to their workstations.
If the driver you need is not listed, rather than adding the driver to
the RMS, you can choose None from the top of each list. Users will
then be asked to provide a disk with the appropriate driver the first
time they install this printer on their workstations.
7 Click Continue.
Network Interface Card
The new Printer Agent will now appear in the Printer Agent List window.
Converting Public-Access Printers to Controlled-Access Printers
To take full advantage of the security and management features provided
by NDS, you may want to convert public-access printers to controlled-access printers.
For example, if you have used a third-party gateway to get a printer up and
running immediately (plug-and-print), the gateway automatically creates a
public-access printer. Later, you may want to convert that printer to a controlled-access printer. The following procedure explains how to convert a
public-access printer to controlled-access.
Prerequisites
To create a controlled-access printer on your network, you must meet the
following prerequisites:
✔
Have at least Read, Write, Modify, and Create privileges for the destination container where its associated Printer object will reside
✔
Be designated as a manager of the NDPS Manager that will control
this Printer Agent
✔
Have a Broker running
✔
Have an NDPS Manager object
✔
Have a public-access printer created
1 In NetWare Administrator, select the container where you want the
printer to reside.
2 Choose Object — Create — NDPS Printer.
This causes the Create NDPS Printer dialog box to appear.
3 Type a name in the Printer Name field.
4 In the Printer Agent Source field, select Public Access Printer.
8-24
Pi4700e
NetWare configuration
8
5 When the Select Public Access Printers list appears, click the CreA warning message appears saying that all clients will need to reinstall
this printer after it is converted.
6 Click the OK button.
7 Select the public-access printer you want to convert to a controlled-ac-
Chapter 8
ate button.
8 Click the Create button.
✎
Note
Novell NetWare Client 4.7 for Windows NT displays a transport error
when you try to add an NDPS Manager or an Agent using Netware Admin. This problem does not exist with Client 4.6 for Windows NT.
Adding NDPS Printers from Windows Clients
Once an NDPS printer had been created, you can add it to the available
printer resources of Windows clients as follows.
To add a printer from a Windows NT 4.x workstation
1 Choose Start — Settings — Printers.
2 Double-click Add Printer.
3 Select Network Print Server and click the Next button.
4 Select NDPS Printers, find the name of your printer, and click the OK
button.
Pi4700e
8-25
Network Interface Card
cess printer and click the OK button.
NetWare configuration
8
For example:
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
❍
5 Finish your printer configuration.
8-26
Pi4700e
Macintosh configuration
8.6
8
Macintosh configuration
Chapter 8
This chapter describes how to configure for network printing in a Macintosh environment.
Setting Up AppleTalk
Use the following procedure to make AppleTalk settings.
Talk.
2 Select Ethernet.
3 Close the AppleTalk dialog box.
Selecting and Setting Up the Printer
You must use the following procedure to configure the driver before printing for the first time.
1 Install the PostScript printer driver and the PPD file for the Digital Copier.
❍
See the documentation that comes with the Digital Copier for information about how to install it.
2 Select Chooser from the Apple menu.
3 Use the field in the upper left of the dialog box to select the appropriate
printer driver for your Digital Copier.
4 Use the field in the lower left of the dialog box to select the zone where
the Digital Copier is connected.
❍
You do not need to select a zone if your network is configured without using zones.
5 In the printer list on the right side of the dialog box, select your Digital
Copier. The default name of this Digital Copier is MLT_<serial number>.
6 Click the Create button. (If the dialog box on your screen does not
have a Create button, click the Setup button instead.)
Pi4700e
8-27
Network Interface Card
1 On the Apple menu, point to Control Panel and then select Apple-
Using the utility software
8
7 Close the Chooser.
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
This completes configuration of the network and printer. The printer can
now be used for printing from different applications. Note that you do not
need to open the Chooser and click the Setup button again once you
complete the above procedure.
Network Card Configuration
The Network Card comes with NIManage for AppleTalk, which is a Macintosh utility program for configuring the Network Card. (Except Mac OS
X)
See “NIManage for AppleTalk (Macintosh)” for information about installing
NIManage for AppleTalk and using its various features and functions.
8.7
Using the utility software
Management Access Program (Windows)
Management Access Program (MAP) is a Windows utility that automatically detects IP and IPX-based Network Cards on a network and provides
a Web browser-based setting and management environment.
MAP automatically detects all the Network Cards on the network and lists
them on a Web browser page. Clicking one of the Network Cards listed on
the Web browser page accesses the Network Card’s built-in HTTP server.
The Web browser can then be used to make Network Card settings.
Requirements
G
Computer must have TCP/IP installed and enabled.
G
Computer must have IPX/SPX-compatible protocol installed. (Required only when using the IPX search function.)
G
Computer must have a Web browser installed.
G
Operating system: Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0 or 2000.
✎
Note
See Appendix A - Installing and Setting Up Network Protocol (Windows) and the applicable Windows documentation for information
about installing TCP/IP and IPX/SPX under Windows.
8-28
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
8
Installing MAP
1 Load the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer you want
to use.
2 Start Setup.exe in the Map folder on the CD-ROM.
Chapter 8
Use the following procedure to install MAP.
stallation.
❍
The default installation directory is C:\Program Files\Map. You
can change this to any other directory during the installation procedure.
Using MAP
Setting Up MAP
1 On the Start menu, point to Programs and then Map.
2 On the submenu that appears, click MAP Setup.
3 Make the settings you want on the dialog box that appears.
Settings
Pi4700e
G
Search for IPX based printers
Check this option when you want to detect IPX/SPX-based printers.
G
Search for IP based printers
Check this option when you want to detect TCP/IP-based printers.
G
Max Hops for IP Search
Input a value for the maximum number of hops for the search. The initial default value is 2.
8-29
Network Interface Card
3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the in-
Using the utility software
8
✎
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
Note
The maximum number of hops value defines the maximum number of
subnetworks the program searches for Network Cards. When a value
of zero is set here, the search does not include any subnetworks to
which the computer is connected. A value of 2 searches all networks
that can be accessed through no more than two routers. Specifying a
value of 15 or greater automatically detects all connected Network
Cards, but such a high setting greatly increases traffic, and so it is not
recommended.
After the settings are the way you want, click the OK button to apply them
and close the dialog box.
Running MAP
1 On the Start menu, point to Programs and then Map.
2 On the submenu that appears, click MAP.
3 A list of Network Cards found by MAP appears on a Web browser
page.
4 Click the URL or the serial number of the Network Card whose settings
you want to change.
5 This displays a Web page for managing the printer where the Network
Card is installed. You can use the Web page to make various Network
Card settings. See “10 PageScope Light” for more information.
8-30
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
8
Network Interface Card
Note
If you start up the Digital Copier with its initial factory default setup
without assigning a Digital Copier IP address, ATIP (Automatic Temporary IP Address) automatically assigns an IP address and subnet
mask. You can use IP address assigned by ATIP to detect the Digital
Copier with the MAP utility. To change the current IP address and subnet mask setting, first access the Digital Copier’s Web setup page from
MAP, and then make the changes you want.
Chapter 8
✎
Pi4700e
8-31
Using the utility software
8
BOOTP (Windows)
Chapter 8
BOOTP is a Windows utility for assigning IP parameters to a Network
Card. When BOOTP is run on a computer, a BOOTP request from a Network Card causes IP parameters that match the MAC address of the Network Card to be assigned to the Network Card.
Network Interface Card
Requirements
G
Computer must have TCP/IP installed and enabled.
G
Network Card must be connected to the same subnetwork as the computer running BOOTP.
G
Operating system: Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0 or 2000.
✎
Note
See Appendix A - Installing and Setting Up Network Protocol (Windows) and the applicable Windows documentation for information
about installing TCP/IP under Windows.
BOOTP does not operate properly on a computer running a DHCP
server.
Using BOOTP
1 On the computer you want to use, maneuver to the directory you want
and copy Bootpl32.exe to it.
❍
Bootpl32.exe is located in the Bootp folder on the CD-ROM.
2 Double-click Bootpl32.exe.
3 On the BOOTP dialog, select Configure from the Admin menu.
4 Input the following parameters.
❍
❍
❍
❍
8-32
IP address assigned to the Network Card
Subnet mask (Must match subnet of connected network.)
Default gateway (Router IP address of connected network.)
Network Card MAC address (Recorded on a label on back of the
Network Card.)
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
8
5 Reset the Digital Copier by powering it down and then back up again.
The above step outputs a fixed-period BOOTP request.
6 Click the Go button on the BOOTP dialog.
7 Wait for about five minutes until the Network Card resets.
8 Select Verify from the Admin menu. You should get a response that indicates whether or not your unit is active.
❍
❍
If you get a message stating that the unit is active, you should be
able to ping to the Network Card using the steps below.
If you get a message stating that the unit is not active, check
whether TCP/IP is enabled on the status page.
9 Display the MS-DOS prompt and type the following:
ping <Network Card IP address>
10 Repeat step 8 until a response is received. Configuration is complete
when a response starting with the words Reply from... is returned.
11 Quit BOOTP.
✎
Note
You cannot use BOOTP to assign an IP address if the Network Card
has already been assigned an IP address by ATIP.
Pi4700e
8-33
Network Interface Card
Note
Use colons to delimit each octet in the MAC address as shown on the
Network Card’s status page.
Chapter 8
✎
Using the utility software
8
NIManage for AppleTalk (Macintosh)
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
This program lets you change Network Card settings on a Macintosh. It
provides the following functions.
G
Modification of printer name and zone name using AppleTalk
G
Enabling and disabling of status page output
G
Error log referencing
G
Enabling and disabling of other protocols, along with display of TCP/
IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address (all of which
can be changed)
G
Operating System: Macintosh System 7.5.3 to 9.x, except Mac OS X
Using NIManage
1 On the computer you want to use, copy AppleTalk NIManage Utility
Program to the folder you want.
❍
AppleTalk NIManage Utility Program is located in the APPLTLK
folder on the CD-ROM.
2 Double-click the AppleTalk NIManage Utility Program to start up the
program and display the screen shown below.
❍
❍
Zone
shows the names of the zones on the network.
Device
shows the Network Cards available in each zone.
✎
Note
The Device display panel is blank if there are no zones on the network.
3 On the Zone display panel, select a zone name.
8-34
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
8
❍
Selecting this Network Card on the Device display panel enables
the Options menu bar, which you can use to select various functions. A command is appears dimmed on the Options menu when
it is not available for some reason.
Configuration
Network Interface Card
Selecting Configuration on the Option menu displays a dialog box for
changing the Network Card device name and AppleTalk zone.
Chapter 8
4 On the Device display panel, select this Network Card.
1 To change the device name, input the new name into the Printer
Name field.
2 To change the AppleTallk zone, use the AppleTalk Zone field pulldown menu to select the zone you want.
✎
Note
You cannot change the zone on a network that does not have any
zones.
3 After making the settings you want, click the OK button.
4 To enable the new settings, power the printer down and then back up
again. You can then check the settings on the status sheet.
Error Log
The error log function can be used to reference the event log stored on the
Network Card. The error log is referenced whenever a Network Card problem occurs.
Selecting Error Log on the Options menu displays error log contents. You
can save the error log as a text file by selecting Save As on the File menu.
You can also print out log contents by selecting Print on the File menu.
Pi4700e
8-35
Using the utility software
8
✎
Chapter 8
Note
The above procedure is not registered in the error log when it is performed. Powering the Digital Copier down clears log contents.
Setting Up the Protocol
Network Interface Card
You can use the Protocol setup command to configure non-AppleTalk
network protocols. On the Option menu, select Protocol setup to display
the dialog box shown below.
You can use the radio buttons on the dialog box to enable and disable protocols. We recommend that you select off for protocols that are not used
on your network.
After enabling TCP/IP, you can set or change IP parameters. Input the values for your network environment into the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway fields on the dialog box.
✎
Note
Check with your network administrator if you are not sure of the IP parameter settings you should make for your network environment.
In some cases, the IP parameters all show zeros. This indicates that
IP parameters are not set, it does not indicate the current IP parameters.
1 After making the settings you want, click the OK button.
2 To enable the new settings, power the Digital Copier down and then
back up again. You can then check the settings on the status page.
8-36
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
8
Check the Enable radio button to enable printing of the status page at
power up.
After making the setting, click the OK button. The setting you make will be
applied from the next time you power up the Digital Copier.
Pi4700e
8-37
Network Interface Card
You can enable and disable printing of the status page each time the Digital Copier is powered up. On the Options menu, select Options to display the dialog box shown below.
Chapter 8
Setting Up the Status Page
Using the utility software
8
NWSetup (Windows)
NWSetup is a program that simplifies setup of the Network Card in a NetWare environment.
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
Requirements
G
A NetWare server on the network
G
IPX/SPX-compatible protocol installed on the computer
G
Novel NetWare Client 32 installed on the computer
G
Operating system: Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0 or 2000.
✎
Note
See Appendix A - Installing and Setting Up Network Protocol (Windows) and the applicable Windows documentation for information
about installing IPX/SPX under Windows.
Installing NWSetup
Use the following procedure to install NWSetup.
1 Load the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer you want
to use.
2 Start Setup.exe in the Nwsetup folder on the CD-ROM.
3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
The default installation directory is C:\Program Files\Nwsetup. You
can change this to any other directory during the installation procedure.
8-38
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
8
Using NWSetup
Note
When setting up NDS (directory server), make sure you are logged in
under the correct tree and context before launching the program.
Selecting a Print Server
1 On the Start menu, point to Programs, and then Nwsetup.
2 On the submenu that appears, click NWSETUP. This displays a list of
all Network Cards available on your network.
3 Click the serial number of the Network Card you want to configure, and
then click Select button.
4 The Print Server Settings dialog box appears. This screen lets you
set up your version of Novell NetWare for the Network Card. See “Novell NetWare Settings” on page 8-40.
Pi4700e
8-39
Network Interface Card
✎
Chapter 8
Installation creates a shortcut to NWSetup on the desktop. You can
launch the program by double-clicking the shortcut icon.
Using the utility software
8
Novell NetWare Settings
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
This section explains the contents of the Print Server Settings dialog box.
Print Server Settings has two screens for setting, and you must input
settings for both to configure a Network Card for Novell NetWare. Each
screen lets you set up your version of Novell Netware for the Network
Card, including directory and bindery services.
8-40
G
Print Server Name
Specifies the NetWare print server name. This name is used when the
Network Card logs into NetWare. Make sure the name you input is different from anything in the network directory and server bindery. This
field accepts input of up to 48 characters.
G
Print Queue Scan Rate
Specifies the rate when the Network Card polls the print queue. Specifying 1 for this field, for example, polls for a new print job once every
second. You can specify a value within the range of 1 to 250.
G
Print Server Password and Print Server Password Retype
Specifies the password when the Network Card logs into NetWare.
Changing the contents of this field changes the password for both NetWare and the Network Card. This field accepts input of up to 32 characters. This dialog box does not close if the contents of the Password
and Password Retype fields are not identical.
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
G
8
Ethernet Frame Type
Specifies the Ethernet frame type used as the default by the NetWare
protocol stack. Only one frame type can be selected.
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
Clicking the Next button displays the screen show below.
G
Enable NDS Mode
Enables and disables support off directory services by the Network
Card.
❍
Checking this option enables directory services support.
Unchecking this option disables directory services support, and causes all other settings on the dialog box to appear dimmed.
❍
G
Preferred NDS Context
Input a character string showing the NDS directory context to be used
by the Network Card when logging into the network. This field accepts
input of up to 128 characters.
✎
Note
Input the entire context, regardless of type.
Pi4700e
G
Preferred NDS Tree
Input a character string showing the NDS tree to be used by the Network Card when logging into the network. This field accepts input of
up to 48 characters.
G
Enable Bindery Mode
Enables and disables bindery NetWare network services by the Network Card.
❍
Checking this option enables bindery.
8-41
Using the utility software
8
✎
Chapter 8
Note
Disabling this option also disables the Primary File Server field.
Network Interface Card
G
Primary File Server
Specifies the NetWare file server used by the Network Card as the primary file server. When no primary file server is selected yet or when
the selected server cannot be used for some reason, the first file server on the list is selected automatically.
Print Server Settings
Use the settings on this dialog box to configure a print server printer. This
information is normally input using the NetWare NWADMIN or the PCONSOLE utility. NWSetup can also be used to make Network Card printer
settings, even though it does not include the above NetWare utilities. The
following explains each of the settings.
G
Enable Printer
Enables and disables a Network Card and printer support.
❍
Checking this box enables the printer.
Unchecking this box disables the printer and causes all other fields on
this dialog box to appear dimmed.
❍
G
Printer Name Queues Serviced by Printer
Shows the printer name. You cannot change the content of this field.
It lists all the queues serviced by the printer.
❍
A bindery connection queue is shown using the syntax: bindery server
name: queue name.
An NDS connected queue entry includes the distinguished name.
❍
Example:
When the printer services a queue named YOURPTR_Q on a bindery
server named OLD_SERVER, this list shows the entry
OLD_SERVER:YOURPTR_Q.
When the printer services a queue named ENGINEERING_Q on an NDS
server with the distinguishing name ENGINEERING.CORP, this list
shows the entry ENGINEERING_Q.ENGINEERING.CORP.
G
User/Groups Notified by Printer
This field lists all of the users and user groups to which notification is
sent when a printer error is detected.
❍
A bindery connected user or user group is shown using the syntax:
bindery server name:user/group name.
An NDS connected user or user group entry includes the distinguished
name.
❍
8-42
Pi4700e
Using the utility software
8
Example:
Double clicking an entry in the list displays its Notify Setting dialog box.
See “Setting Up Notification” (p. 8-44) for more information.
✎
Note
The Network Card supports notification in bindery mode only.
G
Add Queue
Click this button to display the Adding a Queue dialog box, which contains the fields described below.
❍
Connection/Server
Specifies the server connection. This list includes NDS connections
associated with the current user, and all bindery file server connections. NDS connections are always listed first by default. Selecting a
new connection automatically updates the list.
NDS Context
Specifies the NDS context of the queue. It lists all of the contexts or
sub-contexts of the Queue field. This field is activated only when NDS
support is enabled. By default, NDS Context should be set to the often-used NDS connections from among those specified in the Print
Server Settings dialog box.
Queue
Lists the names of all the queues of the currently selected connections.
❍
❍
When an NDS connection is specified, the queue names of the
selected context and all sub-contexts are displayed.
Changing the NDS Context field context or the Connection/
Server field connection causes the Queue list to change and
reflect the new connection or context.
Double-clicking a listed queue automatically adds the printer’s
services to that queue and closes this dialog box.
G
Pi4700e
Delete Queue
Selecting a queue and then clicking the Delete Queue button displays
a dialog box to confirm whether you really want to delete the queue.
Click Yes to delete or No to abort without deleting anything.
8-43
Network Interface Card
When user Albert of NDS context ENGINEERING.CORP is to notified of
errors on a printer, this list shows the entry ALBERT.ENGINEERING.CORP.
Chapter 8
When user Susan is to be notified about errors on a bindery server named
OLD_SERVER, this list shows the entry OLD_SERVER:SUSAN.
Using the utility software
8
✎
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
Note
Deleting a queue from the list does not physically delete the object
from the file server. You must use the NetWare utility to physically delete the queue from the queue list.
G
Create Queue
The following explains the meaning of each field.
❍
Queue Name
Type in the name of the new queue. You must input a queue name
here whenever creating a new field. This field accepts input of up to 48
characters.
File Server Volume
Specifies the volume for creation of a queue. This field is enabled only
when the current connection is an NDS connection, and lists all available volumes. In the case of a bindery services volume, the default volume name is SYS.
NDS Context
Specifies the NDS context for creation of a queue. This field is enabled
only when the current connection is an NDS connection. The initial default for this field is the NDS context specified by the Add Queue dialog
box. Changing the contents of this field displays a confirmation message asking whether a check should be performed to determine
whether the new context exists in the directory tree. Click the OK button to start the check.
❍
❍
Setting Up Notification
The Notify Settings dialog box appears whenever you double-click an
item listed in the Users/Groups Notified by Printer field on the Print
Server dialog box. Use this dialog box to define users and groups to receive notifications.
✎
Note
The Network Card supports notification in bindery mode only.
The following explains the fields on this dialog box.
G
8-44
User/Group name
Specifies the name of the user or group whose notification settings are
being edited. You cannot change the content of this field.
Pi4700e
Pi4700e
G
Delay in minutes for first message
Specifies the amount of time a print job is delayed, in minutes, after
which the Network Cards concludes an error has occurred and sends
a notification message. The default value for this setting is 5 minutes,
and the setting range is 1 to 60 minutes.
G
Delay in minutes for repeat messages
Specifies the amount of time a print job is delayed a second or subsequent times, in minutes, after which the Network Card concludes an
error has occurred and sends a notification message. The default value for this setting is 30 minutes, and the setting range is 1 to 60 minutes.
8-45
Chapter 8
8
Network Interface Card
Using the utility software
Troubleshooting
8
8.8
Troubleshooting
Chapter 8
This chapter explains the Network Card’s LED status indicators and tells
you what to do when experiencing problems with the Network Card. If the
information presented here does not solve your problem, contact your
nearest Support Center or Technical Service Representative.
LED Status Indicators
Network Interface Card
The Network Card has two LED status indicators amber and green in color.
The amber LED shows the progress of normal print jobs. It flashes while
the Network Card is sending or receiving data, and goes out when there
is no data send or receive operation in progress.
The green LED shows normal Network Card operation, as described in
the table below.
8-46
LED Operation
Digital Copier Status
Network Card Status
Normal/
Abnormal
Green LED lit
Power on
Self-test in progress
Normal
Print job standby
Normal operation
Normal
Green LED flashes 3
times, then remains lit
Self-test finished
Prints status page
Normal
Green LED flashes
quickly
Self-test in progress
RAM abnormality detected
Abnormal
Green LED flashes 4
times, then pauses
Self-test in progress
Ethernet hardware self-test
failed. Check your network.
Abnormal
Amber LED flashes at
short interval for 10
seconds. Amber LED
goes out, green LED
flashes continuously.
Flash memory selftest in progress
Checksum test failed. Automatically enters download
mode and waits for flash
memory refresh.
Abnormal
Green LED flashes
slowly
After power up, goes
into print job standby
after a short while.
Broken connection between
NetWare and file server
Abnormal
Green LED and amber
LED flash alternately
Power up sequence
complete
Factory initial default reset
complete. Power down and
move jumper JP2 to OFF position. See “Resetting to Factory Initial Defaults”.
Abnormal
Pi4700e
Troubleshooting
8
Troubleshooting
1 Is the Digital Copier on line?
Check whether the Digital Copier is on line. Nothing can be printed
while the Digital Copier is off line.
2 Is the Digital Copier control panel display normal?
See the documentation that comes with the Digital Copier for information about its control panel.
3 Is the Network Card LED status indicator normal?
Check the LED indicators for abnormalities. See “LED Status Indicators” (p. 8-46) for more information.
4 Is the network cable connected securely?
Check to make sure the network cable is securely connected to the 10/
100BaseT port. Try changing to another cable to find out if the problem
is due to a damaged cable.
5 Are Network Card control settings correct?
Check the protocol that is enabled on for the Network Card. Make sure
that the protocol being used by the Network Card is also enabled on
the computer.
6 Has there been any change in network configuration?
Check to make sure that settings are correct for any network hardware
that has been added, modified or removed.
7 Has there been any change in the computer’s applications?
If you have recently added an application to the computer, check to
make sure that the application is not interfering with network settings.
8 Can you print from other applications?
If you can print successfully from other applications, perform the proper troubleshooting procedures for the application with which you are
experiencing problems.
9 Can you print from other computers?
If you can print successfully from other printers, perform the proper
troubleshooting procedures for the operating system of the computer
on which you are experiencing problems.
Pi4700e
8-47
Network Interface Card
General Troubleshooting Checklist
Chapter 8
Check the points described below whenever you experience problems
with Network Card operation.
Troubleshooting
8
NetWare Troubleshooting Checklist
Chapter 8
Check the following points whenever you are experiencing problems while
using NetWare.
1 Is the print server name input correctly?
The default printer name is MLT_<serial number>. The serial number
is recorded on the Network Card.
2 Is a proper print queue assigned to the printer?
Network Interface Card
We recommend that you do not assign a print queue that is also assigned to other printers. Doing so can cause a print job to be sent to
another printer.
3 Is Remote Other/Unknown selected as the printer type?
If PCONSOLE settings are correct, the problem may be due to a break
in the connection between the Digital Copier and network. Power
down the Digital Copier, start up PCONSOLE, and wait until the Not
Connected message appears. Next, power the Digital Copier back up
again. The connection is normal if the displayed message changes to
Waiting for Job. Otherwise there is a problem with the connection.
4 Is there enough disk space on the file server and is the server operating normally?
5 Is the printer associated with the correct file server?
Use PCONSOLE to check.
6 Do you have the proper privileges for setting up printers?
7 Are the file server and print server communicating normally?
On any computer on the network, run the NetWare COMCHECK utility
to check for proper communication.
8 Are there sufficient user positions on the file server?
The print server logs on as a user.
9 Is bindery context set up on the file server?
With some versions of NetWare, you must set up the bindery context
on the file server even when you are using the NDS Mode.
10 Is the network loaded on the client computer?
See the NetWare documentation for more information.
11 Are client application settings correct?
For example, check to make sure that the correct client driver is being
used.
8-48
Pi4700e
Troubleshooting
8
12 Is the computer connected correctly to the print queue?
queue become active?
14 Are you using the correct version of PCONSOLE?
Network Card configuration is impossible with PCONSOLE Version
1.0.
15 Is AUTO ENDCAP enabled?
Data can be sent to the network using AUTO ENDCAP. Use PRINTCON to check if AUTO ENDCAP is enabled. If it is disabled, enable it.
✎
Note
Whenever the connection between the Network Card and file server is
broken for any reason, it takes from about five to ten minutes to re-establish a connection. If a connection is not established within this time,
check for errors and correct any problems you discover.
The Network Card cannot print from any other context other than that
which is installed. When you want to print from another context, you
must create an alias queue. See the related NetWare documentation
for more information.
Resetting to Factory Defaults
You can reset the Network Card so all of its parameters return to the initial
factory default settings. Be sure to reset the Network Card before moving
the Digital Copier to a different network environment (NetWare file server,
IP subnet, etc.)
Reset can be performed using a Web browser. For details, see
“10 PageScope Light”.
If, for some reason, you cannot access the Network Card using a Web
browser, you can reset it using a jumper switch on the Network Card.
Pi4700e
8-49
Network Interface Card
13 Does a sample print job sent directly from PCONSOLE to the assigned
Chapter 8
Print a file and confirm that the job is sent to the print queue. If the job
is sent correctly, check for a problem in the connection between the
computer and print server.
Jumper switch setting
8
8.9
Jumper switch setting
Chapter 8
This chapter explains how to change the settings of the Network Card’s
jumper switch settings.
Normally, the Network Card automatically makes network configuration
settings, so you do not need to change jumper switch settings. There may
be certain situations, however, where it becomes necessary to change
jumper switch settings.
Network Interface Card
✎
Important!
Special care is required when handling the Network Card.
The Network Card is designed to protect components from electrostatic discharge during normal operation. Be sure to take proper electrostatic protection measures whenever handling the Network Card.
Be sure to unplug the Digital Copier from its power outlet before starting
work. For full details on handing the Network Card, see the Setup Instructions that comes with the Network Card.
Network Card and Jumper Pin Positions
The illustration below shows the positions of the jumper switches on the
Network Card.
* Default pin positions are indicated in gray.
Resetting to Factory Defaults
Jumper switch OP2 can be used to reset all Network Card parameters to
their initial factory default settings. The function of OP2 is to reconfigure
8-50
Pi4700e
Jumper switch setting
8
1 Power down the Digital Copier and unplug it from its power outlet.
2 Disconnect the network cable from the Network Card.
3 Remove the Network Card from the printer by performing the steps in
Setup Instructions in reverse.
4 Locate the reset jumper switch (labeled OP2) on the Network Card.
See the illustration under “Network Card and Jumper Pin Positions”.
5 Change the OP2 jumper switch to its FACT position (OP2 set to pins
1 and 2).
6 Use the procedures in Setup Instructions to re-install the Network
Card. Do not connect the network cable to the Digital Copier at this
time.
7 Plug in the Digital Copier and power it up.
The Network Card performs a self-test, indicated by the green LED
flashing three times, following by the green LED and amber LED flashing alternately. After the green and amber LEDs start to flash, power
down the Digital Copier and unplug it from its power outlet.
8 Remove the Network Card from the Digital Copier again.
9 Return the OP2 jumper switch to pins 2 and 3.
10 Use the procedures in Setup Instructions to re-install the Network
Card.
Pi4700e
8-51
Network Interface Card
Network Card Reset Procedure
Chapter 8
NVRAM. Reset the Network Card before moving the printer to another environment or any other time is becomes necessary to reconfigure it to suit
another environment.
Jumper switch setting
8
Address Selection
Chapter 8
Either one of two memory address blocks can be used to access the common memory interface. The two memory address blocks are named CS1
and CS2. The CS1 space is used when only one card is being used. Use
jumper switch JP2 to select the address space. Setting the jumper switch
pin to 1-2 selects CS2, while pin setting 2-3 selects CS1.
Bus Handshaking
Network Interface Card
The bus handshake signal can be changed to match the print controller
being used. In the case of this Digital Copier, the handshake signal is the
WAIT signal (OP3 pin 2 and 3 setting).
8-52
Pi4700e
Specifications
8.10
8
Specifications
123.7 mm (L) × 95 mm (H)
Weight
225 g
Environmental
Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Humidity: 5% to 80%
Buttons/Indicators
Green LED, Amber LED (1 each)
Configuration Setup
Onboard non-volatile memory
Connector: Ethernet
RJ45 10/100Base T (8-wire)
10/100BaseT Cable
Be sure to use Category 5 shielded 10/100BaseT cable that conforms with
the pinouts shown below.
Pi4700e
Pin No.
Color
8
Blue/White
7
Blue
6
Orange/White
5
Green/White
4
Green
Ethernet
Receive -
3
Orange
Receive +
2
Brown/White
Send -
1
Brown
Send +
8-53
Network Interface Card
Dimensions
Chapter 8
Network Card
Network Interface Card
Chapter 8
8
8-54
Specifications
Pi4700e
Outline
9
9
Scanner Mode
Note
In order to use the scanning function, the optional network interface
card must be installed.
9.1
Outline
Scanner Mode
There are two scan modes you can use with this machine: Use the one
appropriate to the network environment and purpose of use.
E-Mail (Scan to E-mail)
Pi4700e
G
Transmits scanned document as attached file with E-mail.
G
Suitable for sending low-resolution data.
G
Environment of Network with Mail server is necessary.
Chapter 9
✎
9-1
Outline
9
Folder (Scan to Server)
Transmits scanned document to the folder specified by FTP server.
G
Suitable for sending high-resolution data.
G
Environment of Network with FTP server is necessary.
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
G
9-2
Pi4700e
Outline
9
URL
Transmits scanned document to the folder specified by FTP server.
G
At the same time, transmits URL of FTP server with E-Mail.
G
Suitable for sending high-resolution data.
G
Environment of Network with Mail server and FTP server is necessary.
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
G
✎
Note
If a key previously programmed with a destination for Scan to E-Mail
or Scan to Server is touched at the same time and the scanning is performed, this URL operation is performed.
Pi4700e
9-3
Outline
9
Necessary Settings
To use the Scanner Mode, it is necessary to perform the following network
settings first.
You use PageScope Light to make these settings. For the details of PageScope Light, see “10 PageScope Light”.
Chapter 9
Set Item
E-mail
Folder (Server)
IP Address
❍
❍
Subnet Mask
❍
❍
SMTP Server Address
❍
−
Reply Address
❍
−
SMTP Connection Timeout
❍
−
Default Compression
❍
−
FTP Proxy Server Address
−
Proxy Port No.
−
E-mail Destination List
❍
−
File Destination List
−
❍
Scanner Mode
Default Gateway
* ❍ : Necessary
: Necessary depending on environment
− : Not necessary
Necessary Devices (servers)
Set Item
E-mail
Folder (Server)
Network Interface Card
❍
❍
SMTP Server
❍
−
FTP Server
−
❍
* ❍ : Necessary
9-4
: Necessary depending on environment
− : Not necessary
Pi4700e
Network Setting
9.2
9
Network Setting
Accessing to PageScope Light
PageScope Light for Pi4700e can be accessed directly from a Web
browser.
below.
http://<IP address of printer controller>/
(Example) When the IP address of the printer controller is
192.9.200.200:
http://192.9.200.200/
3 This causes PageScope Light for Pi4700e screen to appear.
Operation
PageScope Light for Pi4700e operation is identical to that for Internet Web
pages. Clicking a hot link jumps to the link destination, and the Back and
Forward buttons scroll through pages backwards and forward.
Logging In to the Admin Mode
After you log in to PageScope Light in the Admin Mode, you can change
the configuration of the Digital Copier settings.
1 Type the administrator password into the Admin Password box. The
initial default administrator password is sysadm. See “Preference”
(p. 10-6) for information about how to change the password.
2 Click the Log-in button to log in to the Admin Mode.
3 When you want to log out, click the Log-out button.
✎
Note
Log out is performed automatically if no operation is performed for
more than 10 minutes.
On the Network tab, a password input text box appears on each setting screen. You must be able to input the correct password in order to
change Network tab settings. The password you should input here is
the same as the Admin Password you input on other tabs.
Pi4700e
9-5
Scanner Mode
2 In the URL field, enter the IP address of the printer controller as shown
Chapter 9
1 Start the Web browser.
Network Setting
9
SMTP & FTP Configuration
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
This screen appears when you click SMTP & FTP Configuration on the
Scanner tab. Use this screen to make SMTP and FTP settings.
SMTP Configuration Section
✎
Important!
You must provide information for the SMTP Server Address and Reply Address when you are using the Send to E-mail function. E-mail
cannot be sent if these settings are left blank.
9-6
SMTP Server Address
Type in the IP address of the SMTP server.
Default Subject for E-mail
Attachment
Type in the default subject when distributing scanner data as email attachments.
Default Subject for FTP
Notification
Type in the default subject when informing by e-mail the URL
of the FTP site where scan data is left.
Reply Address
Type in the mail address for a mail replay showing the error
message when a send error is generated.
SMTP Connection Timeout
Input the SMTP server connection timeout in seconds. You can
input a value from 1 to 120 seconds.
Default Compression
Select the default compression method to be used when distributing scanned data as direct mail.
Pi4700e
Network Setting
9
FTP Proxy Configuration Section
Type in the IP address of the FTP proxy server.
Remote Port Number of
Proxy
Type in the proxy port number. You can input a value from 1 to
65535.
Apply button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
FTP Proxy Server Address
Pi4700e
9-7
E-mail Destinations
9
9.3
E-mail Destinations
✎
Note
When registering a destination, it must first be entered in PageScope
Light, and then registered from the touch panel of the digital copier.
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
This screen appears when you click the E-mail Destinations sub-menu
under the Destination menu. It lists the E-mail Destinations that are currently registered.
9-8
G
Clicking an unused cell inside the E-mail Destination List displays a
screen for registering a new E-mail Destination. See “Configuring an
E-Mail destination” (p. 9-9) for more information.
G
Clicking an existing E-mail Destination number or name displays a
screen showing the details of that destination. See “Configuring an EMail destination” (p. 9-9) for more information.
G
To delete an E-mail Destination, click the del button next to the destination you want to delete.
Pi4700e
E-mail Destinations
9
Configuring an E-Mail destination
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
This section describes the settings you can make on the screens for registering a new E-mail destination and for changing the configuration of an
E-mail destination.
E-mail Destination Section
No.
E-mail Destination number
Destination Name
Type in the name of the E-mail Destination. You can input up
to 72 characters.
Destination Address
Type in the e-mail address of the destination. You can input up
to 72 characters.
Scanning Mode Section
Compression
Select the compression method to be used when scanned data
is sent as an e-mail attachment.
Apply Button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear Button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Icon
Pi4700e
Click to return to the previous screen.
9-9
E-mail Destinations
9
Checking/changing registration (PageScope Light)
1 Start PageScope Light.
2 Click Scanner.
3 Click E-mail Destination.
4 Click the number assigned to the destination to be checked or modiChapter 9
fied.
Deleting registration (PageScope Light)
1 Start PageScope Light.
Scanner Mode
2 Click Scanner.
3 Click E-mail Destination.
4 Enter your admin. password, then click Log-in.
5 Click the del. button of the destination to be deleted.
New registration (touch panel of the digital copier)
1 Press the [Utility] Key.
2 Touch [Job/Image/Scan Input].
3 Touch [Scanner Addr. Input].
9-10
Pi4700e
E-mail Destinations
9
Chapter 9
4 Touch the key to be registered.
5 Type in the name that will appear on
Scanner Mode
the key (for example, “MLTMO”).
6 Touch [Next].
7 Touch [E-mail].
8 Type in the destination.
✎
Note
Type in the destination name that
was entered when the e-mail destination was specified with PageScope Light. In the screen shown at
the right, the name “Nancy” is entered for the example with the email address “[email protected]” in the screen shown on page 9-8.
Or type in the e-mail address directly without using PageScope Light.
9 Touch [Enter].
Pi4700e
9-11
E-mail Destinations
9
Checking/changing registration (touch panel of the digital
copier)
1 Press the [Utility] Key.
Chapter 9
2 Touch [Job/Image/Scan Input].
Scanner Mode
3 Touch [Scanner Addr. Input].
4 Touch the address to be changed.
5 Confirmation screen will appear. If you touch an item to be changed,
you will change the content.
9-12
Pi4700e
E-mail Destinations
9
Deleting registration (touch panel of the digital copier)
1 Press the [Utility] Key.
Chapter 9
2 Touch [Job/Image/Scan Input].
Scanner Mode
3 Touch [Scanner Addr. Input].
4 Touch the address to be deleted.
5 Touch [Delete].
Pi4700e
9-13
E-mail Destinations
9
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
6 Touch [Yes] and touch [Enter].
9-14
Pi4700e
File destinations
9.4
9
File destinations
✎
Scanner Mode
This screen appears when you click the File Destinations sub-menu under the Destination menu. It lists the File Destinations that are currently
registered.
Chapter 9
Note
When registering a destination, it must first be entered in PageScope
Light, and then registered from the touch panel of the digital copier.
Pi4700e
G
Clicking an unused cell inside the File Destination List displays a
screen for registering a new File Destination. See “Configuring a File
Destination” (p. 9-16) for more information.
G
Clicking an existing File Destination number or name displays a
screen showing the details of that destination. See “Configuring a File
Destination” (p. 9-16) for more information.
G
To delete an File Destination, click the del button next to the destination you want to delete.
9-15
File destinations
9
Configuring a File Destination
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
This section describes the settings you can make on the screens for registering a new file destination and for changing the configuration of a file
destination.
File Destination Section
9-16
File Destination No.
File Destination number
Destination Name
Type in the name of the File Destination. You can input up to
72 characters.
FTP Server Address
Type in the IP address of the FTP site.
Directory
Type in the directory of the FTP site where the scan data is located. You can input up to 128 characters.
Use Proxy
Put a check mark into this box to enable access of the FTP site
via a proxy.
Remote Port Number
When not using a proxy, input the FTP port number. You can
input a value from 1 to 65535.
Pi4700e
File destinations
9
Select this option to enable log in to the FTP site using an anonymous account.
Private Site
Make the following settings for non-anonymous account log in
on the FTP site.
• User Name:
Type in the user name for logging in to
the FTP site. You can input up to 64
characters.
• Password:
Type in the password for logging in to
the FTP site. You can input up to 40
characters.
• Confirm:
Re-input the password to confirm it.
Scanning Mode Section
Pi4700e
Compression
Select the compression method to be used when scanned data
is send by FTP.
Apply Button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear Button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Icon
Click to return to the previous screen.
9-17
Scanner Mode
Anonymous
Chapter 9
Account Information Section
File destinations
9
New registration (touch panel of the Digital Copier)
1 Press the [Utility] Key.
Chapter 9
2 Touch [Job/Image/Scan Input].
Scanner Mode
3 Touch [Scanner Addr. Input].
4 Touch the key to be registered.
5 Type in the name that will appear on
the key (for example, “MLTMH”).
9-18
Pi4700e
File destinations
9
6 Touch [Next].
7 Touch [Folder].
8 Type in the destination.
✎
9 Touch [Enter].
Checking/changing registration (touch panel of the digital
copier)
1 Press the [Utility] Key.
2 Touch [Job/Image/Scan Input].
3 Touch [Scanner Addr. Input].
Pi4700e
9-19
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
Note
Type in the destination that was entered when the file destination was
specified with PageScope Light. In
the screen shown at the right, the
destination ftp://192.168.10.12/pub
is entered for the example with the
name “annie_file” in the screen shown on page 9-15.
File destinations
9
Chapter 9
4 Touch the address to be changed.
5 Confirmation screen will appear. If you touch an item to be changed,
you will changed, you will change the content.
Deleting registration (touch panel of the digital copier)
Scanner Mode
1 Press the [Utility] Key.
2 Touch [Job/Image/Scan Input].
3 Touch [Scanner Addr. Input].
9-20
Pi4700e
File destinations
9
Chapter 9
4 Touch the address to be deleted.
Scanner Mode
5 Touch [Delete].
6 Touch [Yes] and touch [Enter].
Pi4700e
9-21
File destinations
9
Direct Input
1 Press the [Scan] Key.
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
2 Set Original.
3 Touch [Direct].
4 Enter the mail address or FTP server address of the destination. (Refer
to “How to input characters.”)
Up to five different destinations can
be specified.
5 Press the [Start] Key.
✎
Note
The FTP server address of the destination that was entered when the
file destination was specified with PageScope Light.
9-22
Pi4700e
File destinations
9
Scanning double-sided original:
Double-sided original can be scanned when Duplexing Document Feeder
is attached.
Chapter 9
1 Touch [Original].
Scanner Mode
2 Touch [Double-Sided].
3 Touch [Margin] and select the file
margin position of the original.
4 Touch [Enter].
Pi4700e
9-23
File destinations
9
5 Touch [Original Direction] and se-
Chapter 9
lect the direction of the original.
6 Touch [Enter].
Scanner Mode
7 Touch [Enter].
Scanning with size specified:
1 Touch [Scan Size].
2 Touch the size to be scanned.
When [Inch] or [Metric] is selected, the corresponding size will be displayed.
You can also select [Custom Size] to numerically specify the scan
size.
9-24
Pi4700e
File destinations
9
Scanning with density changed:
Chapter 9
1 Touch [Image Type].
2 Touch [Lighter] or [Darker] to select
Scanner Mode
density.
3 Touch [Enter].
Pi4700e
9-25
File destinations
9
Scanning with Image Type changed:
Chapter 9
1 Touch [Image Type].
2 Touch [Text], [Text/Photo], or [Pho-
Scanner Mode
to] to select Image Type.
3 Touch [Enter].
Scanning with file format changed:
1 Touch [File Form].
9-26
Pi4700e
File destinations
9
Chapter 9
2 Select [TIFF] or [PDF].
3 Touch [Enter].
Scanning with resolution changed:
Scanner Mode
1 Press the [Clear] Key.
2 Enter the resolution (100 dpi to 600
dpi) from the 10-Key Pad.
Pi4700e
9-27
How to input characters
9
9.5
How to input characters
Input alphabet letters and symbols by touching keys on screen. Input numerals using numeric keys.
Display input
character.
Scanner Mode
Chapter 9
Input capital letters by
touching it
to highlight.
Back space key
9-28
Switches screen for
inputting symbols.
Pi4700e
System requirements
10
10
PageScope Light
10.1
System requirements
The following items are required to use this utility.
Computer
G
Software
Operating System
Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000
Web Browser
Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher
Macintosh System 7 or higher
Chapter 10
Netscape Communicator 4.7 or
higher
Internet Explorer 4.5 or higher
Solaris 2.5.1/2.6/7 (2.7)
Netscape Navigator 4 or higher
Linux
Netscape Navigator 4 or higher
G
NIC (Network Interface Card)
G
Ethernet
G
TCP/IP Protocol
PageScope Light
Netscape Navigator 4 or higher
Digital Copier
Pi4700e Printer Controller
✎
Note
If “Proxy Server” of the Web browser is set to “ON”, it may not be possible to access PageScope Light.
Pi4700e
10-1
Access
10
10.2
Access
PageScope Light for Pi4700e can be accessed directly from a Web
browser.
1 Start the Web browser.
2 In the URL field, enter the IP address of the printer controller as shown
below.
http://<IP address of printer controller>/
(Example) When the IP address of the printer controller is
192.9.200.200:
http://192.9.200.200/
Chapter 10
3 This causes PageScope Light for Pi4700e screen to appear.
Operation
PageScope Light
PageScope Light for Pi4700e operation is identical to that for Internet Web
pages. Clicking a hot link jumps to the link destination, and the Back and
Forward buttons scroll through pages backwards and forward.
Entering the password
After you log in to PageScope Light in the Admin Mode, you can change
the configuration of the Digital Copier settings.
1 Type the administrator password into the Admin Password box. The
initial default administrator password is sysadm.
2 Click the [Log-in] button to log in to the Admin Mode.
3 When you want to log out, click the [Log-out] button.
✎
Note
Log out is performed automatically if no operation is performed for
more than 10 minutes.
On the Network tab, a password input text box appears on each setting screen. You must be able to input the correct password in order to
change Network tab settings. The password you should input here is
the same as the Admin Password you input on other tabs.
10-2
Pi4700e
Screen configuration
10.3
10
Screen configuration
The configuration of the PageScope Light for Pi4700e screen is shown
below.
✎
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
Note
Screen images shown in this manual may differ slightly from actual
ones. Also note that specifications are subject to change without prior
notice.
Minolta PageScope Light Logo
Clicking the logo jumps to the Website below.
www.minolta.com
Status Display
The current status of the Digital Copier is indicated by both icons and text.
The message Ready appears when the Digital Copier is operating normally.
Ready
Pi4700e
Error
Caution
Fatal
10-3
Screen configuration
10
Tabs
Use the tabs to select the category of items you want to display. See the
following sections of this document for detailed information about each
tab.
Menus
Use the menus to select information or setting items. The menus that appear depend on the currently selected tab.
See the following sections of this document for detailed information about
each menu.
Information and Settings Display
Chapter 10
This display shows information or settings in accordance with the selected
menu item.
Admin Password
PageScope Light
Inputting the admin password provides access to the Admin Mode. See
“Entering the password” (p. 10-2) for more information.
10-4
Pi4700e
System tab
10.4
10
System tab
On the System tab, information concerning the system structure for the
Digital Copier can be checked and set, Checking and setting can be performed with the ➀ Summary, ➁ Details, ➂ Preference, ➃ Maintenance
and ➄ Online Assistance menus.
➀ Summary
A summary of the status and the system structure of the Digital Copier is
displayed.
➁ Details
The details of the status and the system structure of the Digital Copier and
displayed.
G
Input Tray
It shows the current status of all the Input Trays installed on the Digital
Copier
G
Output Tray
In shows the current status of all the Output Trays installed on the Digital
Copier
Pi4700e
10-5
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
➀
➁
➂
➃
➄
System tab
10
G
Hard Disk
It shows the status of the hard disk installed on the printer controller. This
information is not displayed when there is no hard disk installed on the
printer controller.
G
ROM Version
It shows version of firmware installed on the Digital Copier and printer controller.
G
Interface Info
It shows information about network interface and local interface.
G
Consumable
Chapter 10
It shows the current status of Digital Copier consumables.
➂ Preference
The environment settings such as the refresh rate time and the system
language can be specified.
PageScope Light
➃ Save Setting
This screen appears when you click the Save Setting menu on the System tab. You can use the screen that appears to save the Digital Copier
setup to a file. Note that only settings you can make with PageScope Light
are saved to the file. Saved setups can be recalled to set up the Digital
Copier when required.
➄ Online Assistance
Enter information concerning product support and check it when necessary.
10-6
Pi4700e
Job tab
10.5
10
Job tab
You can use the Job tab for managing print jobs sent to the Digital Copier
from clients, and for sending files directly from clients for printing.
Print Job Management
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Print Job Management menu on
the Job tab. Use this screen to manage print jobs sent from clients to the
Digital Copier.
File Download
This screen appears when you click the File Download menu on the Job
tab. You can use this screen to send a file directly from a client to the Digital Copier.
Pi4700e
10-7
Printer tab
10
10.6
Printer tab
The Printer tab shows information and settings for printing on the Digital
Copier.
Settings
Sub-menus appear when you click the Settings menu on the Printer tab.
Click the sub-menus to display screens for changing the printer setup.
G
Paper Handling
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Paper Handling sub-menu under
the Settings menu. Use this screen to configure the input tray and output
bins.
Input Section
Copies
Input a value indicating the number of copies.
Priority Source
Specify the default input tray. The menu shows only the trays
that are currently available for selection.
Output Section
10-8
Bin
Bin names when mail bin manager is installed
Bin Name
Type in the name of the user of each bin. You can input up to 32
characters.
Restore Factory Default Button
Click this button to return settings to their initial factory defaults.
Apply Button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear Button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Pi4700e
Printer tab
G
10
Page Layout
Pi4700e
Paper Size
Select the page layout paper size to be used when printing is
performed without a paper size specified by the client.
Duplex
Use this setting to turn two-side printing on and off, and to specify either long-edge binding or short-edge binding.
Restore Factory Default Button
Click this button to return settings to their initial factory defaults.
Apply Button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear Button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
10-9
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Page Layout sub-menu under
the Settings menu. Use this screen to configure the print document page
layout.
Printer tab
10
G
Printer Setting
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Printer Setting sub-menu under
the Settings menu. Use this screen to configure the printer controller.
Printer Settings Section
Printer Language
Select the printer control code type.
Download Font/PS
Header Hold on RAM
When the box next to this option is checked, downloaded fonts
and PostScript header remain in printer controller RAM as long
as power is supplied to the printer controller. This option appears
after printer controller memory has been increased.
PostScript Settings Section
Error Print
When the box next to this option is checked, an error message is
printed whenever a PostScript error is generated.
PCL Settings Section
10-10
Orientation
Specify the orientation of the printed page.
Font Size
Type in a value specifying the size in points for proportional fonts.
Pitch
Type in a value specifying the number of characters per horizontal inch for uniform space fonts.
Font No.
Type in a font number.
Symbol Set
Select the symbol set you want to use with the font. The default
symbol set is used if the symbol set you select is currently not
available.
Form Length
Type in a value specifying the number of lines per page.
Restore Factory Default Button
Click this button to return settings to their initial factory defaults.
Apply Button
Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this
point.
Clear Button
Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this
point.
Pi4700e
Printer tab
10
Printer Front Panel
Pi4700e
Display
This area shows the printer controller message display. Messages are the same as the Status Display messages that appear in
the upper part of the window.
Online Button
Toggles the printer controller network connection on line and off
line
Proceed Button
Click this button to force printing of the job whose data is still in
the controller.
10-11
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Operational Panel menu on the
Printer tab. It provides on-screen emulation of the printer controller’s operational panel.
Printer tab
10
Test Print
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Test Print menu on the Printer
tab. It lets you select a test print page and execute a test print operation.
10-12
Config Page
Insert a check mark into the box to print the printer controller setup page.
PCL Font List
Insert a check mark into the box to print the PCL font list.
PostScript Font List
Insert a check mark into the box to print the PostScript font list.
Network Config
Insert a check mark into the box to print the network configuration.
Print Button
Click this button to execute a test print operation.
Pi4700e
Printer tab
10
Font Information
Pi4700e
PCL Internal Font
PCL fonts built into the printer controller
PCL Download Font
PCL fonts downloaded from the computer to the printer controller
PostScript Font
PostScript fonts built into the printer controller
PostScript Download
Font
PostScript fonts downloaded from the computer to the printer
controller
Font Name
Font name
Font ID
Unique control number for each downloaded font
Font #
Downloaded font number
Location
Storage location of the font (ROM, RAM, HDD)
10-13
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Font Info menu on the Printer
tab. It shows a list of PCL fonts and PostScript fonts built into the printer
controller.
Printer tab
10
Printer Reset
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Printer Reset menu on the Printer tab. Use this screen to reset the printer controller.
Printer Controller
10-14
Clicking the Reset button displays a confirmation message asking if you want to perform the reset. Click Yes to reset the printer
controller. Applicable users are informed if a reset is executed
while a print operation or data receive operation is in progress.
Pi4700e
Printer tab
10
Maintenance
HDD Format Section
HDD Format
Use this section to format the hard disk drive. Clicking the Format button displays a confirmation screen. Click Yes to format
the hard disk.
Firmware Update Section
File Name
Type in the full path to the firmware definition file you want to
download to the printer controller. You can also click the Browse
button to display a dialog box for selecting the file.
Send new Firmware to
Printer
Click the Send button to download the firmware to the printer
controller.
Restore Factory Default Section
Printer Controller FW
Pi4700e
Use this section to return printer controller settings to their initial
factory defaults. Clicking the Restore button displays a confirmation screen. Click the Yes button to restore the initial factory
default settings.
10-15
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Maintenance menu on the Printer tab. Use this screen to format the hard disk drive and to update the
printer controller firmware.
Printer tab
10
Local Interface
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
This screen appears when you click the Local I/F menu on the Printer
tab. Use this screen to view and configure local interface information.
10-16
Timeout
Input a value specifying how much time, in seconds, should be
allowed to pass after data is received through the parallel port
before it is decided that a job is finished.
I/O Buffer Size
I/O buffer size
Bi-Directional
Bi-directional communication setting
Timing
Printer data read timing
Pi4700e
Scanner tab
10.7
10
Scanner tab
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
The Scanner tab contains settings for configuration of the Digital Copier
scanner function. For details about the scanner function, see the
“9 Scanner Mode” section.
Pi4700e
10-17
Network tab
10
10.8
Network tab
PageScope Light
Chapter 10
The Network tab contains settings for configuration of the Digital Copier
Network function. For details about the network function, see the “Printer
Driver” section (p. 3-23).
10-18
Pi4700e
Unable to Print
11
11
Troubleshooting
11.1
Unable to Print
Possible Cause
Action
A message appears
on the computer
screen, saying something to the effect that
“no printer is connected”, “no paper is
loaded.” or “LPT1
write error”.
An error is present in the machine.
Check the control panel of the
machine: If an error is displayed,
identify the error and take the
necessary action by referring to
the “Error List” on page 11-6.
The printer cable or network cable is disconnected.
Check that the printer cable or
network cable is connected
properly to the computer and
controller.
Printing does not
start despite the completion of printing setup on the computer.
An error is present in the machine.
Check the control panel of the
machine: If an error is displayed,
identify the error and take the
necessary action by referring to
the “Error List” on page 11-6.
The printer cable or network cable is disconnected.
Check that the printer cable or
network cable is connected
properly to the computer and
controller.
The printer driver selected for
printing is not for the Pi4700e.
Check the printer name.
A print job yet to be processed is
loaded in the machine, causing
the printer to wait.
Refer to the Job List on the machine control panel to check for
print order.
(for Linux)
File to be printed is not a PS file.
Pi4700e
Delete job and check to see if it
is PS file.
11-1
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Chapter 11
This section explains about the troubleshooting procedures for possible
malfunctions. Perform the troubleshooting procedures given below in that
order when the machine is unable to print even if you execute a print command from your computer.
Unable to Print
Troubleshooting
Chapter 11
11
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Continued from the
previous page (Printing does not start despite the completion
of printing setup on
the computer.)
The print job is locked.
Refer to the Job List on the machine control panel to see if the
print job in question is locked. If
so, unlock it.
The connection of the controller
to the network has not been established.
Consult the network administrator.
The print job was canceled.
Check the status on the “Incompleted Job Queue” of “Page
Scope Light”.
Machine memory space available is not sufficient.
Add the machine memory to expand its space.
If the copy track function is enabled, an illegal access number
might have been entered.
Enter the correct access number.
Multiple copy sets are
mistakenly sorted
and stapled together
as a single large set.
The settings in certain DTP software applications may conflict
with the printer driver settings.
In the application, turn OFF Collate and set the copy count to
one. In the printer driver, make
the desired Collate, Sorting and
copy count settings.
A large number of
copies are mistakenly
printed.
The settings in certain DTP software applications may conflict
with the printer driver settings.
In the application, turn OFF Collate and set the copy count to
one. In the printer driver, make
the desired Collate, Sorting and
copy count settings.
A document containing more than 40
pages cannot be
printed.
The maximum number of document pages that can be stored in
the standard memory is 40.
• Decrease the number of document pages or add memory
to expand its capacity.
• Select “Printer” for “Priority
Device” available in 6/6 of User’s Choice on the machine.
A PS error print is
output.
Some applications allow you to
select either “Binary” or “ASCII”
mode when the PS driver is being used. A PS error could result
if an attempt is made to print in
the “Binary” mode.
Select the “ASCII” mode.
If the problem persists even after these checks have been made, refer to
the documentation provided for the machine.
11-2
Pi4700e
Unable to Print
11
Unable to Make Correct Settings / Unable to Print Exactly as
Set
Perform the troubleshooting procedures given below in the order when
you cannot make proper settings in the printer driver or when the print results do not represent what has been set.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
The options are
dimmed on the computer screen.
An illegal combination of functions has been made.
Reselect functions.
The “Conflicts” dialog
box is displayed on
the computer screen.
An illegal combination of functions has been made.
Check for combination and
make a correct combination of
functions.
Unable to print exactly as set.
Incorrect settings are made.
Check the setting for each item
of the printer driver.
The watermark cannot be printed.
The watermark is not correctly
set.
Check the watermark setting.
The “Darkness” setting of the
watermark is low.
Check the “Darkness” setting of
the watermark.
(for Windows, Linux)
Staple can be specified only
when the type of Finisher you
are using is selected on the “Device Options Setting” tab and
“Auto” is selected for “Output
Setting” on the “Setup” tab.
Select the type of Finisher you
are using on the “Device Options
Setting” tab, and select “Auto”
for “Output Setting” on the “Setup” tab.
(for Macintosh)
Staple can be specified only
when the type of Finisher you
are using is selected on the “Installable Options” property sheet
and “Auto” is selected for “Output Setting” on the “Printer Specific Options” property sheet.
Select the type of Finisher you
are using on the “Installable Options” property sheet, and select
“Auto” for “Output Setting” on the
“Printer Specific Options” property sheet.
No stapling can be effected in
the following case:
Paper size other than 182 × 182
mm to 297 × 432 mm is specified, paper source is manual
feed port, exit port other than
Auto is selected, Booklet is
specified, OHP Interleaving is
specified, Uncollated is specified.
Pi4700e
Check the setting of the paper
size, paper source, exit port,
Booklet, OHP Interleaving, and
Collated.
11-3
Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
Unable to specify
Staple.
The combination of the functions, though valid on the printer
driver, is invalid on the machine.
(for Linux)
Certain items can be set only by
root user in “Device Options Setting”.
Unable to Print
11
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Unable to staple
properly.
No stapling can be effected if the
type of paper is thick paper or
OHP transparencies.
Check the type of paper.
When Mailbin Finisher or Multistaple Finisher is installed, no
stapling can be effected if number of prints to be made exceeds
50.
Check the number of prints to be
made.
When Single-staple Finisher is
installed, no stapling can be effected if number of prints to be
made exceeds 30.
No stapling can be effected if the
number of pages to be printed is
50 or more when a Folding Finisher is mounted. Center Staple
is also disabled if the number of
pages to be printed is 15 or
more.
The stapling position
is opposite to what is
expected.
The paper direction and N-up do
not match the setting made for
Orientation.
Change the setting for Orientation.
Unable to specify
Punch.
Either a Multi-staple Finisher,
Mailbin Finisher or Folding Finisher must be mounted to enable
the setting of Punch, and “Multistaple Finisher”, “Mailbin Finisher” or “Folding Finisher” must be
selected from “Installable Options” to specify Punch.
Select “Multi-staple Finisher”
“Mailbin Finisher” or “Folding
Finisher” from “Installable Options.”
Punch cannot be specified if
Booklet or OHP interleaving is
specified.
Check the setting of Booklet and
OHP Interleaving.
No holes can be made if the type
of paper is thick paper or OHP
transparencies.
Check the type of paper.
Prints can at times be fed out
without being punched if the direction of the paper loaded in the
paper source is not appropriate.
Check the direction of the paper.
The paper direction and N-up do
not match the setting made for
Orientation.
Change the setting for Orientation.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 11
No stapling can be effected if
original document contains pages of different sizes.
Unable to effect
Punch.
The hole punch position is opposite to
what is expected.
11-4
Pi4700e
Unable to Print
11
Folding cannot be
specified.
(for Windows)
The optional Folding Finisher is
necessary for you to specify
Folding. “Folding Finisher” must
be selected on “Device Options
Setting” tab.
(for Macintosh)
The optional Folding Finisher is
necessary for you to specify
Folding. “Folding Finisher” must
be selected on “Installable Options.”
Pi4700e
Action
Select “Folding Finisher” on “Device Options Setting” tab.
Select “Folding Finisher” on “Installable Options.”
Folding may be disabled when
Staple or Punch is specified.
Check the settings made. (See
“Function combination matrix”
(p. 12-1, p. 12-4, p. 12-7).)
Folding is not effected.
Folding cannot be effected if the
type of paper is Thick Paper or
OHP.
Check the type of paper.
Unable to print image
properly.
Machine memory space available is not sufficient.
Add machine memory to expand
its space, or simplify the image
to reduce the amount of data
handled.
Unable to specify the
exit port.
No exit port can be specified if
the paper size is A6 or B6, or
OHP Interleaving is specified.
Check the setting of the paper
size and OHP Interleaving.
Unable to properly
feed prints out to the
specified port.
Prints with paper size of B6 or
smaller cannot be fed out if paper exit port is Mailbin.
Check the paper type and paper
size.
Paper is not fed from
the specified paper
source.
Paper may not be fed from the
specified paper source if that paper source is loaded with paper
of a different size and direction.
Load the paper source with paper of the appropriate size and in
the appropriate direction.
Watermark is not
printed.
Watermark may not be printed in
graphics applications.
No watermark can be printed in
this case.
Unable to print exactly as set.
The paper size, paper direction,
and other settings made on the
application takes precedence
over those made in the driver.
Make the correct settings on the
application.
Error dialog box is
output instead of Setting dialog box.
Unusable combination of device
and settings with Easy Set being
stored could have been
achieved by changing of device
installed.
Open file specified in the error
dialog box, delete applicable settings.
Distribution cannot
be specified.
To specify Distribution, a “Hard
Disk Drive in Copier” that is optional on the machine is necessary. “Hard Disk Drive in Copier”
must be specified in “Device Options Setting.”
Select “Hard Disk Drive in Copier” on “Device Options Setting.”
11-5
Chapter 11
Possible Cause
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Unable to Print
11
Poor Print Quality
Perform these troubleshooting procedures when you get poor print quality.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Shades of gray are not
clear.
Halftone setting is improperly
set.
Check the setting made in
“Halftone” in the “Quality” property sheet.
If the problem persists even after these checks have been made, refer to
the documentation provided for the machine.
Error List
When an error occurs, the machine control panel gives the message of
“Controller failure -> 18xx.”
Troubleshooting
Chapter 11
The table below lists the meanings of different error codes, together with
the appropriate remedial procedures. Should an error occur, identify the
detail of the error and take the necessary action.
11-6
Code
Description
Action
18A0
NVRAM error
Issued when a fault is found in
the condition of the setting values saved in the NVRAM of the
controller.
Turn OFF the power, then turn it
ON. If error persists, consult
your Tech. Rep.
18A1
NIC initialization error
18A3
Version error
18A7
ROM update data load failure
18A8
ROM update data write failure
18F1
Machine communications error
18F2
Controller fatal error
18D0
Hard disk being formatted
This error is eliminated as soon
as formatting is completed.
18D1
Hard disk format error
Execute formatting from PageScopeLight again.
If error persists, consult your
Tech. Rep.
18B8
Scan job canceled for short of
machine memory space
18C0
Memory short during image conversion
Recovers 10 minutes later, or
when next scan job starts.
If error persists, consult your
Tech. Rep.
18C1
Scan job NIC processing error
Pi4700e
Unable to Print
11
Code
Description
Action
18C2
Scan job controller processing
error
Recovers 10 minutes later, or
when next scan job starts.
If error persists, consult your
Tech. Rep.
18A4
ROM update data loading
18A5
ROM update data writing
Recovers as time passes, or by
conducting job.
18A6
ROM update data completed
Troubleshooting
Chapter 11
This manual contains the specifications for the controller. Refer to the documentation provided for the machine for the machine specifications.
Pi4700e
11-7
Unable to Print
11-8
Pi4700e
Troubleshooting
Chapter 11
11
Function combination matrix (Windows)
12
12
Appendix
12.1
Function combination matrix (Windows)
Finishing
Paper Source
Manual Feed
×
×
×
×
×
×
Manual Feed
×
×
×
Uncollated
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
❍
× ❍ ❍ ×
Collated
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
Crease
Half Folding
Z-Fold
Off
Short Edge
Long Edge
Off
Short Edge
Long Edge
Corner
Center
× ❍ ❍ × ❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ×
Sorted
Folding
Off
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
LCC
Punch
Sorted
Collated
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍
Uncollated
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
LCT
×
×
×
× ●
❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Corner
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ×
×
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ×
×
×
Short Edge
❍ ❍ × ●
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Center
❍ ❍ × ●
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
× ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ×
×
❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
×
× ❍
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
Short Edge
❍ ❍ × ●
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Z-Fold
❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ×
❍ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Half Folding
❍ ❍ ×
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Crease
❍ ❍ × ●
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
1-sided 1up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
2-sided 1up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
1-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
2-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Scaling
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Booklet
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
× ❍ × ❍ ×
×
× ❍ ❍ ×
× ❍ ×
×
A
Distribution Number
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Watermark
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
×
×
× ❍ ×
× ❍ ×
×
Cover mode
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
Pi4700e
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
OHP Interleaving
×
×
× ❍
12-1
Chapter 12
Printer Specific Options
×
LCT
Staple
Layout
×
×
Appendix
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
Folding
LCC
Paper Source
Auto
Punch
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
Auto
Staple
Function combination matrix (Windows)
12
OHP Interleaving
Cover mode
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
Collated
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper Source
Printer Specific Options
Punch
❍
❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
Off
Watermark
❍
Uncollated
Folding
× ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Corner
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ × ❍
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ × ❍
Short Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ × ❍
Center
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ × ❍
Short Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ × ❍
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Z-Fold
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
×
Half Folding
❍ × ❍ × ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
×
Crease
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ A ❍ ❍ × ❍
1-sided 1up
Layout
Distribution Number
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
Manual Feed
Booklet
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
LCT
Scale
LCC
Sorted
Chapter 12
2-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
2-sided 1up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
1-sided 1up
Auto
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
Staple
Appendix
1-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
Layout
×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
× ❍ ❍ × ❍
2-sided 1up
×
1-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
×
×
2-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
×
×
×
Scale
×
×
×
×
Booklet
❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
❍ ❍ × ❍
Distribution Number
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Watermark
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
OHP Interleaving
❍ × ❍ × ❍ ×
Cover mode
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
12-2
❍
❍ × ❍
❍ ❍
× ❍
×
Pi4700e
Function combination matrix (Windows)
12
❍
: The combination is possible.
×
: The combination is impossible. (The settings made are rejected.)
●
: Cannot be used if the LCT rejects loading of paper in the lengthwise direction.
: Does not function if special paper setting has been made.
A
: Can be set on the PS driver, but not on the PCL driver.
✎
Appendix
Chapter 12
Note
Some combinations may not function properly depending on the size
and direction of the paper.
Pi4700e
12-3
Function combination matrix (Macintosh)
12
Function combination matrix (Macintosh)
Printer Specific Options
Paper Source
Printer Specific Options
Chapter 12
Layout
Appendix
×
LCT
×
×
×
Manual Feed
×
×
×
Uncollated
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍
× ❍ ❍ ×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ×
×
×
×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Corner
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ×
×
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Short Edge
❍ ❍ × ●
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Center
❍ ❍ × ●
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
Short Edge
❍ ❍ × ●
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ×
×
❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
❍ ×
×
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Z-Fold
❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍
× ❍ ❍ ×
Off
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Half Folding
❍ ❍ ×
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Crease
❍ ❍ × ●
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
×
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
×
OHP Interleaving
×
Cover mode
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
1-sided 1up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
2-sided 1up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
1-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
2-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Scale
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
12-4
×
×
× ●
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Off
×
Crease
Half Folding
Z-Fold
Off
Short Edge
Long Edge
Center
Short Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
Collated
Folding
× ❍ ❍ × ❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ×
Sorted
Punch
Long Edge
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
Corner
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍
×
LCC
Off
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
Sorted
×
×
Collated
Manual Feed
×
×
Uncollated
LCT
×
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
Staple
Folding
LCC
Paper Source
Auto
Punch
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
Auto
Staple
Off
12.2
×
× ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
Pi4700e
Function combination matrix (Macintosh)
12
Scale
LCC
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
LCT
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Manual Feed
❍ ❍ ❍
Uncollated
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Collated
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍
❍
Folding
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Corner
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Long Edge
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Short Edge
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Center
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Long Edge
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Short Edge
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Z-Fold
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ × ❍ × ❍
Half Folding
×
Crease
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ×
OHP Interleaving
×
Appendix
Punch
Off
Chapter 12
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Staple
Printer Specific Options
2-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Sorted
Layout
1-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
2-sided 1up
Cover mode
Auto
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
1-sided 1up
OHP Interleaving
Paper Source
Layout
× ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Cover mode
×
1-sided 1up
❍ ❍
2-sided 1up
×
1-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
❍ ❍ ×
×
2-sided 2, 4, 6, 9, 16up
× ❍ ×
×
×
Scale
❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
❍ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
❍
: The combination is possible.
×
: The combination is impossible. (The settings made are rejected.)
●
: Cannot be used if the LCT rejects loading of paper in the lengthwise direction.
: Does not function if special paper setting has been made.
Pi4700e
12-5
Function combination matrix (Macintosh)
12
✎
Note
Some combinations may not function properly depending on the size
and direction of the paper.
✎
Appendix
Chapter 12
Tip
1Side and 2Side of Layout mean the following.
1Side: Duplex Print = Off
2Side: Duplex Print = Short Edge or Long Edge
12-6
Pi4700e
Function combination matrix (Linux)
Function combination matrix (Linux)
Finishing
Paper Source
×
×
×
×
×
×
Manual Feed
×
×
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
❍
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
Crease
Half Folding
Z-Fold
Off
Short Edge
Long Edge
Short Edge
Long Edge
Corner
Off
Center
× ❍ ❍ × ❍ × ❍ ×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
Uncollated
Folding
Sorted
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ×
Collated
Punch
Collated
Uncollated
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍
× ●
❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
×
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Corner
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ×
×
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ×
×
×
Short Edge
❍ ❍ × ●
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Center
❍ ❍ × ●
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Long Edge
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
Short Edge
❍ ❍ × ●
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ×
×
❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
❍ ×
×
×
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Z-Fold
❍ ×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
×
Half Folding
❍ ❍ ×
×
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
×
×
×
Crease
❍ ❍ × ●
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
× ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Long Edge Binding
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ × ❍
Short Edge Binding
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
Distribution Number
×
×
× ❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
× ❍ ×
× ❍ ×
OHP Interleaving
×
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
Pi4700e
× ❍
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍ × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Cover mode
Chapter 12
Manual Feed
× ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
×
LCT
×
×
LCC
Staple
Printer Specific Options
×
LCT
Sorted
Duplex
×
×
×
×
× ❍
12-7
Appendix
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
Folding
LCC
Paper Source
Auto
Punch
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
Auto
Staple
Off
12.3
12
Function combination matrix (Linux)
12
Cover mode
❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
Tray1, 2, 3, 4
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
LCC
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
LCT
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
❍ ❍ ❍
Manual Feed
Uncollated
❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍
Collated
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
❍ ❍ × ❍ ❍
Printer Specific Options
Staple
Punch
Folding
Duplex
Chapter 12
Distribution Number
Auto
Sorted
Appendix
Short Edge Binding
OHP Interleaving
Paper Source
Long Edge Binding
Duplex
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Corner
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
Long Edge
❍ × ❍ × ❍
Short Edge
× ❍ ❍ × ❍
Center
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Long Edge
❍ × ❍ × ❍
Short Edge
× ❍ ❍ × ❍
Off
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Z-Fold
❍ × ❍ ×
×
Half Folding
×
× ❍ ×
×
Crease
❍ ❍ ❍ × ❍
Long Edge Binding
Short Edge Binding
Distribution Number
× ❍ ×
❍
❍ ×
❍
×
❍ ❍
×
× ❍
OHP Interleaving
×
Cover mode
❍ ❍ ❍ ×
×
×
❍
: The combination is possible.
×
: The combination is impossible. (The settings made are rejected.)
●
: Cannot be used if the LCT rejects loading of paper in the lengthwise direction.
: Does not function if special paper setting has been made.
12-8
Pi4700e
Number of registrations
12.4
12
Number of registrations
Number of registrations/Usable range for Easy Set
Registration
Use
Printer icon
–
–
• 16/1 driver
❍
Application
–
–
• 16/1 driver
❍
Printer icon
–
–
×
❍
Application
–
–
×
❍
Printer icon
• 16/1 driver
❍
×
❍
Application
• 16/1 driver
❍
×
❍
Printer icon
–
–
• 32/1 driver
❍
Application
–
–
×
❍
Printer icon
–
–
• 32/1 driver
❍
Application
–
–
×
❍
Printer icon
• 32/1 driver
❍
×
❍
Application
×
❍
×
❍
Chapter 12
Administrator
Power Users
Users
Power Users
Administrator
Users
PCL6
PS
Pi4700e
Windows2000/XP/NT4.0
Use
Appendix
Window95/98
Registration
12-9
Number of registrations
12
Number of registrations/Usable range for Watermark
Window95/98
Power Users
Administrator
Power Users
Users
PS
Appendix
Chapter 12
Users
PCL6
Administrator
Registration
12-10
Windows2000/XP/NT4.0
Use
Registration
Use
Printer icon
–
–
• Common: 16
• Personal: 16
• Common
• Personal
• [All users]
Personal
Application
–
–
• Common: 16
• Personal: 16
• Common
• Personal
• [All users]
Personal
Printer icon
–
–
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Application
–
–
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Printer icon
• 32/1 driver
❍
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Application
• 32/1 driver
❍
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Printer icon
–
–
• 32/1 driver
❍
Application
–
–
×
❍
Printer icon
–
–
• 32/1 driver
❍
Application
–
–
×
❍
Printer icon
• 32/1 driver
❍
×
❍
Application
×
❍
×
❍
Pi4700e
Number of registrations
12
Number of registrations/Usable range for Custom Paper
Window95/98
Pi4700e
Windows2000/XP/NT4.0
Use
Registration
Use
–
–
• Common: 16
• Personal: 16
• Common
• Personal
• [All users]
Personal
Application
–
–
• Common: 16
• Personal: 16
• Common
• Personal
• [All users]
Personal
Printer icon
–
–
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Application
–
–
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Printer icon
• 32/1 driver
❍
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Application
• 32/1 driver
❍
• Common: 0
• Personal:
16/1 user
• Personal
• [Administrator]
Common
Printer icon
–
–
• 32/1 driver
❍
Application
–
–
×
❍
Printer icon
–
–
• 32/1 driver
❍
Application
–
–
×
❍
Printer icon
• 32/1 driver
❍
×
❍
Application
×
❍
×
❍
Chapter 12
Printer icon
Appendix
Power Users
Power Users
Users
PS
Administrator
Users
PCL6
Administrator
Registration
12-11
Preview Listing
12
12.5
Preview Listing
[Page Layout]
Appendix
Chapter 12
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
Screen Specifications
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
Orientation=
Portrait
Orientation=
Landscape
Duplex/Booklet=
Long Edge Binding,
Orientation=
Portrait
Duplex/Booklet=
Short Edge Binding,
Orientation=
Portrait
Duplex/Booklet=
Short Edge Binding,
Orientation=
Landscape
Duplex/Booklet=
Long Edge Binding,
Orientation=
Landscape
Duplex/Booklet=
Booklet Left Binding,
Orientation=
Portrait
Duplex/Booklet=
Booklet Right Binding,
Orientation=
Portrait
Duplex/Booklet=
Booklet Left Binding,
Orientation=
Landscape
Duplex/Booklet=
Booklet Right Binding,
Orientation=
Landscape
12-12
Screen Specifications
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
N-up=2up,
Orientation=
Portrait
N-up=2up,
Orientation=
Landscape
N-up=4up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert. Ascending
N-up=4up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert. Descending
N-up=4up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Ascending
N-up=4up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Descending
N-up=6up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Ascending
N-up=6up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Descending
N-up=6up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert.
Ascending
N-up=6up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert.
Descending
Pi4700e
Screen Specifications
Chapter 12
Screen Specifications
Appendix
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
12
12-13
Preview Listing
12
Appendix
Chapter 12
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
Screen Specifications
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
N-up=9up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert.
Ascending
N-up=9up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert.
Descending
N-up=9up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Ascending
N-up=9up,
Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Descending
N-up=16up, Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Ascending
N-up=16up, Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Horiz.
Descending
N-up=16up, Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert.
Ascending
N-up=16up, Orientation=
Portrait,
PageLocation=
Vert.
Descending
Screen Specifications
Watermark
12-14
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
12
[Printer Figure]
Screen Specifications
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
No Installed Options
Dup + 2way Tray
Dup + LCC or Duplex
Cabinet
LCT
(Dup + LCC)
Mailbin Finisher
(Dup + LCC)
Single-Staple Finisher
or Multi-Staple Finisher
(Dup + LCC)
Screen Specifications
Chapter 12
Value Defined for
Print Setting Item
Appendix
Folding Finisher
(Dup + LCC)
Pi4700e
12-15
Preview Listing
12
[Setting Preview]
Value Defined
for Print
Setting Item
Duplex/Booklet
Appendix
Chapter 12
Detail of Output
Setting (Staple)
Detail of Output
Setting (Punch)
12-16
Screen Specifications
Value Defined
for Print
Setting Item
Short Edge Binding
Long Edge Binding
Booklet Left Binding
Booklet Right Binding
Corner Staple
Center
Long Edge
Short Edge
Long Edge
Short Edge
Screen Specifications
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
12
Value Defined
for Print
Setting Item
Detail of Output
Setting
(Folding)
Justify Output Size
[Z-fold]
Screen Specifications
Value Defined
for Print
Setting Item
Screen Specifications
Half folding
Crease
Uncollated
Collated
Sorting
Unsorted
Sorted
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
All Raster
Off
On
Appendix
Chapter 12
Collate
Pi4700e
12-17
Preview Listing
12
Value Defined
for Print
Setting Item
Off
Value Defined
for Print
Setting Item
Screen Specifications
On
Appendix
Chapter 12
Smoothing
Screen Specifications
12-18
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
12
Specifications for the controller
The basic specifications for Pi4700e are given below.
Transfer Image Density
: 600 × 600 dpi
Interface (on host)
: Centronics Interface
Networks
: 10/100BaseT (UTP)
Network Protocol
Network Management
Weight
: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
: To be managed from SNMP-compatible Web
browser
: 5V±5%, 5A max, 3.3V±3%, 2A max
: 20W max.
: Width: 8-5/8 in. (220 mm) × Depth: 12-5/8 in.
(320 mm) × Height: 2-3/8 in. (60 mm)
: 4 lbs. (1.8 kg)
Operating Environment
Temperature
Humidity
: 50°F (10°C) to 95°F (35°C)
: 15 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Power Requirements
Power Consumption
Exterior Dimensions
Fonts
Pi4700e
: PCL5e/PCL6, 80
Adobe PostScript Level 3 Emulation Type 1
font, 136
Symbol Set, 8
12-19
Chapter 12
CPU
ROM (program)
RAM
: Pi4700e
: Built-in controller
: PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript level 3 Emulation
: Determined by the specifications of the digital copier
: PowerPC 740 (200 MHz)
: 8 MB (Smart Media)
: 32 MB (on Board)
: Max. 160 MB (DIMM)
Appendix
Model Name
Type
Printer Language
Print Speed
Preview Listing
12
Font
Appendix
Chapter 12
PCL font, 80
12-20
Courier
Courier Italic
CG Times
Courier Bold
CG Times Bold
Courier Bold Italic
CG Times Italic
Letter Gothic
CG Times Bold Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
CG Omega
Letter Gothic Italic
CG Omega Bold
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
CG Omega Italic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
CG Omega Bold Italic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Coronet
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
Clarendon Condensed
ITC Bookman Light
Univers Medium
ITC Bookman Light Italic
Univers Bold
ITC Bookman Demi
Univers Medium Italic
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Univers Bold Italic
CourierPS
Univers Medium Condensed
CourierPS Oblique
Univers Bold Condensed
CourierPS Bold
Univers Medium Condensed Italic
CourierPS Bold Oblique
Univers Bold Condensed Italic
Helvetica
Antique Olive
Helvetica Oblique
Antique Olive Bold
Helvetica Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Garamond Antiqua
Helvetica Narrow
Garamond Halbfett
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Garamond Kursiv
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Marigold
New Century Schoolbook Roman
Albertus Medium
New Century Schoolbook Italic
Albertus Extra Bold
New Century Schoolbook Bold
Arial
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
Arial Bold
Palatino Roman
Arial Italic
Palatino Italic
Arial Bold Italic
Palatino Bold
Times New Roman
Palatino Bold Italic
Times New Roman Bold
SymbolPS
Times New Roman Italic
Times Roman
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Times Italic
Symbol
Times Bold
Wingdings
Times Bold Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
12
Pi4700e
Eurostile Bold
Albertus MT Light
Eurostile Extended Two
Albertus MT Italic
Eurostile Bold Extended Two
Antique Olive Italic
Geneva
Antique Olive Bold
Gill Sans
Antique Olive Compact
Gill Sans Italic
Antique Olive Roman
Gill Sans Bold
Arial MT
Gill Sans Bold Italic
Arial Italic MT
Gill Sans Condensed
Arial Bold MT
Gill Sans Bold Condensed
Arial Bold Italic MT
Gill Sans Extra Bold
Avant Garde Book
Gill Sans Light
Avant Garde Book Oblique
Gill Sans Light Italic
Avant Garde Demi
Goudy
Avant Garde Demi Oblique
Goudy Italic
Bodoni
Goudy Bold
Bodoni Italic
Goudy Bold Italic
Bodoni Bold
Goudy Extra Bold
Bodoni Bold Italic
Helvetica
Bodoni Poster
Helvetica Bold
Bodoni Poster Compressed
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Bookman Demi
Helvetica Oblique
Bookman Demi Italic
Helvetica Condensed
Bookman Light
Helvetica Condensed Oblique
Bookman Light Italic
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Apple Chancery
Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique
Chicago
Helvetica Narrow
Clarendon
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Clarendon Light
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Clarendon Bold
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Cooper Black
Hoefler Text Regular
Cooper Black Italic
Hoefler Text Italic
Coronet Regular
Hoefler Text Black
Courier
Hoefler Text Black Italic
Courier Bold
Joanna MT
Courier Bold Oblique
Joanna MT Italic
Courier Oblique
Joanna MT Bold
Eurostile
Joanna MT Bold Italic
Appendix
Albertus MT
Chapter 12
PostScript font, 136
12-21
Preview Listing
12
Appendix
Chapter 12
Letter Gothic
Times Roman
Letter Gothic Slanted
Times Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
Times Bold
Letter Gothic Bold Slanted
Times Bold Italic
Lubalin Graph Book
Times New Roman MT
Lubalin Graph Book Oblique
Times New Roman Italic MT
Lubalin Graph Demi
Times New Roman Bold MT
Lubalin Graph Demi Oblique
Times New Roman Bold Italic MT
Marigold
Univers
Monaco
Univers Oblique
Mona Lisa Recut
Univers Bold
New York
Univers Bold Oblique
New Century Schlbook Bold
Univers Condensed
New Century Schlbook Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Oblique
New Century Schlbook Italic
Univers Condensed Bold
New Century Schlbook Roman
Univers Condensed Bold Oblique
Optima
Univers Light
Optima Italic
Univers Light Oblique
Optima Bold
Univers Extended
Optima Bold Italic
Univers Extended Oblique
Oxford
Univers Bold Extended
Palatino Roman
Univers Bold Extended Oblique
Palatino Italic
Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
Palatino Bold
Zapf Dingbats
Palatino Bold Italic
Wingdings
Stempel Garamond Roman
Candid (emulates Carta)
Stempel Garamond Italic
Taffy (emulates Takton)
Stempel Garamond Bold
Copperplate Gothic ThirtyTwo BC
Stempel Garamond Bold Italic
Copperplate Gothic ThirtyThree BC
Symbol
Hoefler Text Ornaments
Symbol Sets
No.
1
12-22
Symbol Set Name
Roman 8
2
PC-8
3
PC-8 D/N
4
IBM 850
5
ECMA Latin 1
6
Legal
7
Latin 2
8
Latin 5
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
12
Selectable Paper Sizes
Letter / 11 × 17 / 11 × 14 / Legal / Invoice
Executive / A6 / A5 / A4 / A3 / B6 / B5 / B4
Appendix
Chapter 12
FLS1 / FLS2 / FLS3 / FLS4
Pi4700e
12-23
Preview Listing
12
Accessories
Pi4700e Quick Start Guide
Appendix
Chapter 12
Printer Driver (CD-ROM) for Pi4700e Controller
12-24
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
12
Glossary
10BASE-T
A network data transfer standard established by the IEEE. The network
uses a twisted-pair cable carrying 10 megabits per second (10Mbps).
100BASE-T
A network data transfer standard established by the IEEE. The network
uses a twisted-pair cable carrying 100 megabits per second (Mbps).
application
A software program that performs a particular function, such as generating graphics or spreadsheets.
click
To press and release a mouse button quickly. Often used to select an object. SEE double-click.
control panel
A bank of indicators that show the current status of the printer.
Panel buttons that are located on the control panel make it possible to perform a variety of different operations.
double-click
Pressing a mouse button twice in quick succession while keeping the
mouse in place. Often used to open a dialog or enable a function. SEE
click.
display
A visual output device of a computer.
resolution
The fineness of detail of the output print, expressed in the number of dots
per inch (dpi, or dots per inch). Higher resolution produces text and graphics with greater sharpness and fineness of detail, but results in a greater
amount of data involved.
EtherTalk
The AppleTalk protocol supporting Ethernet. It allows Macintosh users to
use the Ethernet.
Pi4700e
12-25
Appendix
A box that appears in order for the user to input information or settings required for the printer to operate.
Chapter 12
dialog box
Preview Listing
12
font
A complete set of characters in a given typeface and style. The size of
characters is specified in points (1/72 inches).
Typeface is the distinctive design of types, such as gothic, while style is
an ornament, such as italic.
halftone
Gradations of tones expressed by means of varying densities of dots.
hard disk drive
A device that is contained in a computer and peripheral equipment and
used to save data and files.
In the printer controller, it is used to save fonts downloaded from the computer. Its data is retained even when the main power is turned OFF.
icon
A graphic image on the screen that represents an element.
interface
A standard that governs the ways for two different systems to exchange
information. It specifies the format of data to be transmitted, communications protocols, and physical configurations for connection.
IPX/SPX
Chapter 12
The communications protocols used by NetWare.
landscape (paper orientation)
A horizontal print orientation, in which printing is oriented so that the long
edges of a sheet of paper are on top and bottom.
Appendix
local printer
The printer that is directly connected to the computer being used. A printer
connected to a network is called the remote printer.
memory
The place in a computer where data can be stored and retrieved. The
amount of data stored is expressed in bytes. Memory can either be RAM
or ROM. Generally, the data stored in RAM is lost when power is turned
OFF, while that in ROM is retained even when power is turned OFF, but
cannot be rewritten.
Network Interface Card (NIC)
An optional card to which network interface can be added, used for connecting a printer to network environment.
12-26
Pi4700e
Preview Listing
12
offline
The state of the printer controller, in which it does not receive data or execute any processing.
online
The state of the printer controller, in which it is capable of receiving data
and processing jobs.
operation system
A program or group of programs that control the functions of the computer
and its peripheral devices such as the printer.
parallel interface
A type of standards that govern the ways for two different systems to exchange information, in which multiple bits are transmitted at one time. Because of that, synchronization is necessary, which makes the scheme not
right for data transmission over a long distance. The most common parallel interface is Centronics.
portrait (paper orientation)
A vertical print orientation, in which printing is oriented so that the short
edges of a sheet of paper are on top and bottom.
PostScript font
A scalable outline font standard, widely adopted in the printing industry.
By downloading PostScript fonts in a PostScript-compatible printer, it is
possible to produce smoother letters than bit-mapped fonts can.
PostScript printer software
The program that is used on the computer to enable printing on PostScript
printers.
printer driver
Software that enables controlling printer operations.
print job
A single batch of job for printing specified at one time from an application.
It may be directly transmitted to the printer, or temporarily stored in a print
queue.
Pi4700e
12-27
Appendix
A connector through which data is exchanged between a computer and
peripheral equipment.
The parallel port permits multiple-bit data to be transmitted at one time,
commonly used in printers. The serial port is generally used to connect a
modem or other device.
Chapter 12
port
Preview Listing
12
print manager
An application that manages the print queue and print files.
resolution
See dpi.
SIMM
An acronym for Single In-line Memory Module.
TCP/IP
The standard data transfer protocol over the Internet. Data is transferred
by breaking up data messages into packets, to which IP addresses are attached.
TrueType font
A soft font standard the system has. TrueType is a font technology that
ensures that the printed output is identical to what you see on-screen. It is
also scalable, capable of producing characters in varying sizes.
gray scale
The method of representing color data on a monochrome device by approximating the data with shades of gray (halftone).
paper
Appendix
Chapter 12
The medium on which the printer can print data. Varieties include OHP
transparencies, labels, letterhead, and postcards, in addition to plain paper and recycled paper.
12-28
Pi4700e
Index
B
Booklet printing ..................................................................................7-12
BOOTP ..............................................................................................8-32
C
Collate .................................................................................................7-4
Conflicts dialog box ................................................................. 4-36, 5-35
Controller .............................................................................................1-6
connecting ......................................................................................1-7
Copy track .........................................................................................7-16
Cover page ........................................................................................7-20
D
Device Options Setting tab ........................................................ 4-2, 5-19
Distribution number ...........................................................................7-14
Duplex printing .....................................................................................7-2
E
Easy set .............................................................................................7-29
E-mail destinations ..............................................................................9-8
Enlarging .............................................................................................7-8
Error list .............................................................................................11-6
F
Features of the controller .....................................................................1-1
File destinations .................................................................................9-15
configuring ...................................................................................9-16
new registration ............................................................................9-18
Folding function .................................................................................7-27
Function combination matrix
Linux ............................................................................................12-7
Macintosh .....................................................................................12-4
Windows ......................................................................................12-1
Pi4700e
13-1
Index
13
Chapter 13
13
Chapter 13
13
G
Glossary .......................................................................................... 12-25
Index
H
Hard disk drive .................................................................................... 1-6
How to input characters .................................................................... 9-28
I
Installing the printer driver ................................................................... 2-1
Linux .............................................................................................. 5-2
Mac OS X ...................................................................................... 6-9
Macintosh OS 7/8/9 ....................................................................... 6-1
Windows 2000/XP ......................................................................... 2-9
Windows 95/98/Me ........................................................................ 2-2
Windows NT 4.0 .......................................................................... 2-16
IP Address
specifying from the touch panel ..................................................... 3-2
IPP printing ....................................................................................... 3-21
IPX Peer-to-Peer Printing Program ................................................... 3-14
J
Job list ............................................................................................... 7-34
Job Management tab ...............................................................4-24, 5-33
L
Lock job function ............................................................................... 7-22
LPR printing ...................................................................................... 3-17
M
Management Access Program .......................................................... 8-28
MAP .................................................................................................. 8-28
Memory ............................................................................................... 1-6
13-2
Pi4700e
NDPS .................................................................................................8-16
NDS .....................................................................................................8-8
Network card
jumper switch setting ...................................................................8-50
specifications ...............................................................................8-53
troubleshooting ............................................................................8-46
Network settings
BOOTP (Windows) ......................................................................8-32
Macintosh configuration ...............................................................8-27
MAP .............................................................................................8-28
NetWare configuration ...................................................................8-5
NIManage ....................................................................................8-34
NWSetup (Windows) ....................................................................8-38
system requirements ......................................................................8-3
Windows configuration ...................................................................8-5
NIC board ............................................................................................1-6
NIManage for AppleTalk ....................................................................8-34
Novell Directory Services ....................................................................8-8
Novell Distributed Print Services .......................................................8-16
Number of registrations .....................................................................12-9
N-up printing ........................................................................................7-6
NWSetup ...........................................................................................8-38
O
OHP interleaving ...............................................................................7-18
Operating environment
Linux ..............................................................................................5-1
Macintosh .......................................................................................6-1
Windows 2000/XP ..........................................................................2-8
Windows 95/98/Me ........................................................................2-1
Windows NT 4.0 ...........................................................................2-15
Overlay tab ........................................................................................4-27
Pi4700e
13-3
Index
N
Chapter 13
13
Chapter 13
13
P
PageScope Light
Index
access ......................................................................................... 10-2
Job tab ......................................................................................... 10-7
network setting ............................................................................ 3-23
Network tab ............................................................................... 10-18
password ..................................................................................... 10-2
Printer tab .................................................................................... 10-8
Scanner tab ............................................................................... 10-17
system requirements ................................................................... 10-1
System tab .................................................................................. 10-5
Paper tab .................................................................................4-16, 5-31
PCL6 printer driver
installing ........................................................................................ 2-1
Peer-to-Peer printing
IPX/SPX ...................................................................................... 3-12
TCP/IP ........................................................................................... 3-5
Peer-to-Peer Printing Program ........................................................... 3-8
Poor print quality ............................................................................... 11-6
PostScript printer driver
installing ........................................................................................ 2-1
PostScript tab .................................................................................... 4-31
Preview list ...................................................................................... 12-12
Print optinos
Background Printing .................................................................... 6-19
Print option
Installable options ........................................................................ 6-15
Print options
Color Matching ............................................................................ 6-21
Conflicts dialog box ..................................................................... 6-32
Cover Page ................................................................................. 6-20
Error Handling ............................................................................. 6-23
Finishing Settings ........................................................................ 6-37
General ........................................................................................ 6-18
Job Management ......................................................................... 6-36
Layout .......................................................................................... 6-22
Page Attributes ............................................................................ 6-16
Paper & Quality Settings ............................................................. 6-34
Paper Source Settings ................................................................ 6-35
PostScript Options ....................................................................... 6-17
Printer Specific Options ............................................................... 6-25
Save as File ................................................................................. 6-24
13-4
Pi4700e
Summary ......................................................................................6-39
Print options (Mac OS X) ...................................................................6-33
Print options (Macintosh OS 7/8/9) ....................................................6-14
Chapter 13
13
displaying a properties dialog box ...............................2-6, 2-13, 2-21
general settings ...........................................................2-6, 2-13, 2-20
Printer setting with X window system
Open Linux ...................................................................................5-10
Redhat Linux ..................................................................................5-4
SuSE Linux ..................................................................................5-12
Turbo Linux ....................................................................................5-7
Properties settings
account code ...................................................................... 4-25, 5-33
advanced PostScript ....................................................................4-35
brightness ....................................................................................4-22
collate ................................................................................. 4-17, 5-31
compress bitmap images .............................................................4-31
copies ................................................................................. 4-16, 5-31
cover page ......................................................................... 4-11, 5-26
custom paper ...............................................................................4-19
device options ...................................................................... 4-3, 5-19
distribution .......................................................................... 4-25, 5-33
duplex ..........................................................................................5-23
duplex/booklet ................................................................................4-8
easy set ................................................................................ 4-5, 5-21
folding ................................................................................ 4-13, 5-28
font substitution ............................................................................4-33
fonts .............................................................................................4-32
half toning .......................................................................... 4-22, 4-23
job owner .....................................................................................4-25
lock job ............................................................................... 4-25, 5-33
mailbox setting ..................................................................... 4-4, 5-20
N-up ...............................................................................................4-8
OHP interleaving ................................................................ 4-11, 5-26
orientation .......................................................................... 4-17, 5-31
original document size ....................................................... 4-16, 5-31
output paper size .........................................................................4-16
output setting ....................................................................... 4-9, 5-23
paper source ........................................................................ 4-8, 5-23
PostScript header ........................................................................4-31
PostScript output ..........................................................................4-31
print PostScript error information .................................................4-31
punch ................................................................................. 4-13, 5-28
resolution ........................................................................... 4-21, 4-22
reversal ........................................................................................4-22
Pi4700e
13-5
Index
Printer driver
Chapter 13
13
Index
screen angle ................................................................................ 4-23
screen frequency ......................................................................... 4-23
send fonts as ............................................................................... 4-34
smoothing ................................................................. 4-21, 4-22, 5-24
sorting .................................................................................4-17, 5-31
staple ..................................................................................4-13, 5-28
user name ............................................................................4-3, 5-19
watarmark .................................................................................... 4-27
Properties settings (Linux) ................................................................ 5-18
Q
Quality tab ......................................................................................... 4-21
R
Reducing ............................................................................................. 7-8
S
Scaling ................................................................................................ 7-8
Scan to E-mail ..................................................................................... 9-1
Scan to Server .................................................................................... 9-2
Setting up the network card ................................................................ 8-4
Setup tab ....................................................................................4-7, 5-23
SMTP & FTP configuration ................................................................. 9-6
Specifications .................................................................................. 12-19
T
Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 11-1
U
Unable to make correct settings ....................................................... 11-3
Unable to print ................................................................................... 11-1
Unable to print exactly as set ............................................................ 11-3
URL ..................................................................................................... 9-3
W
Watermarks ....................................................................................... 7-10
13-6
Pi4700e
Pi47
Copyright
2003 MINOLTA CO., LTD.
The information contained in this manual
is subject to change without notice to
incorporate improvements made on the
product or products the manual covers.
2003. 1
MINOLTA CO., LTD.
3-13, 2-chome, Azuchi-Machi, Chuo-ku, Osaka. 541-8556, Japan
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement